Oracle 1z0-515 Data Warehousing 11g Essentials 1/2
Visit the Below Website to access the full version of exam questions for all IT vendors
http://www.free-online-exams.com
QUESTION NO: 55
How does compression affect resource utilization?
A. Reduces the amount of CPU and disk utilization
B. Increases the amount of CPU and disk utilization
C. Reduces the amount of disk but increases CPU utilization for loading
D. Increases the amount of disk but reduces CPU utilization for loading!
Answer: C
Explanation: http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/tividd/td/ITSMFD/SC32-9065-00/en_US/HTML/ab5w0007.htm
QUESTION NO: 56
Your customer wants to use Database Resource Manager to help ensure consistent performance based on users and operations. In designing this implementation, which limitation CANNOT be imposed through Database Resource Manager?
A. Specifying the maximum number of concurrent operations for a resource group
B. Limiting resource consumption for a resource group
C. Specifying the amount of parallelism for a resource group
D. Limiting access to particular data for a resource group
Answer: A
QUESTION NO: 57
How many Exadata Storage Server cells are there in a Full Rack Exadata database machine configuration that has 8 Database Server nodes?
A. 2
B. 14
C. 16
D. 24
Answer: B
QUESTION NO: 58
Identify the true statement about adaptive parallelism.
A. It Is turned on by default.
B. It is turned off by default.
C. You should always leave the default setting
D. There is no such thing.
Answer: B
Explanation: http://kerryosborne.oracle-guy.com/category/oracle/exadata/page/3/
QUESTION NO: 59
Identify the statement about Oracle OLAP that is NOT true.
A. Oracle OLAP cubes are stored in the Oracle relational database
B. Oracle OLAP uses standard Oracle database security.
C. Meta data for Oracle OLAP is accessible in an external data dictionary
D. Oracle OU\P can be deployed using RAC.
Answer: A
Explanation: http://download.oracle.com/docs/cd/B28359_01/olap.111/b28124/whatsnew.htm
According to the answer; "Oracle OLAP uses standard Oracle database security." is a false statement and "Meta data for Oracle OLAP is accessible in an external data dictionary" is a correct statement. But in Oracle documentation, http://download.oracle.com/docs/cd/E11882_01/olap.112/e17123/overview.htm#i1 011393; is says "With Oracle OLAP, standard Oracle Database security features are used to secure your multidimensional data.".
QUESTION NO: 60
Identity the true statement about a data warehouse
A. The data warehouse is typically refreshed as often as a transactional system,
B. Data warehouse queries are simpler than OLTP queries.
C. A data warehouse typically contains historical data.
D. Queries against a data warehouse never need summarized information.
Answer: C
Explanation: http://wiki.oracle.com/page/Oracle+OLAP+Terminology-D
QUESTION NO: 61
Identify the statement about ASM that is NOT true.
A. ASM is easier to manage than file systems.
B. ASM delivers the performance of raw partitions.
C. ASM is an extra cost option for Oracle databases.
D. ASM delivers automatic striping and mirroring.
Answer: B
Explanation:http://download.oracle.com/docs/cd/B28359_01/server.111/b31107/asmprepare.htm
QUESTION NO: 62
Which two statements are true about the advantages of using a
data warehouse?
A. A data warehouse uses fewer database structures, so access to answers is faster and easier
B. A data warehouse is typically implemented with a different design, making access faster.
C. A data warehouse is optimized for ongoing write activity, making response faster.
D. A data warehouse uses specialized features of the Oracle database, like materialized views and star transformations, making response faster.
Answer: A,D
QUESTION NO: 63
What are two ways in which query performance can be improved with partitioning?
A. Partition pruning
B. Partition optimization
C. Partition compression
D. Partition-wise joins
Answer: A,D
QUESTION NO: 64
Your customer is looking to implement ad-hoc analysis in a data warehouse. Which approach is least likely to be used assuming that the customer does not want the expense of managing view?
A. Star schema
B. Snowflake schema
C. Third normal form schema
D. OLAP
Answer: A
QUESTION NO: 65
You have analyzed your client's workload and the Materialized Views Advisor in Enterprise Manager recommends that you create some materialized views to improve performance. What should you do in order to most simply implement this change?
A. Rewrite all the queries in the application to identify materialized view
B. Rewrite existing queries. New queries will automatically use the views.
C. Respond positively to the Advisor to create the materialized views.
D. Build virtual views on a third normal form schema.
Answer: C
QUESTION NO: 66
A Full Rack Oracle Exadata Database Machine can contain 100 TB of disk space with high performance. How much user data should you conservatively estimate this configuration can hold?
A. 100 TB
B. 75 TB
C. 50 TB
D. 28 TB
E. 20 TB
Answer: A
QUESTION NO: 67
What would you do to compress data in partitions that are frequently updated in Oracle Database 11g?
A. Use Hybrid Columnar Compression.
B. Use Advanced Compression Option.
C. Use Hybrid Partitions.
D. Avoid compressing any data.
Answer: A
Explanation:http://blogs.oracle.com/datawarehousing/2010/01/new_whitepaper_on_exadata_hybr.html
QUESTION NO: 68
The Analytic Workspace Manager would be used to generate_______.
A. Materialized views
B. Oracle OLAP Option cubes
C. Oracle Data Mining algorithms
D. Oracle SQL Analytic functions
Answer: B
Explanation: http://forums.oracle.com/forums/thread.jspa?threadID=616811
QUESTION NO: 69
Which feature of Oracle Warehouse Builder can be used to help ensure data quality?
A. Data extraction
B. Data profiling
C. Logical mapping
D. Exception reporting
Answer: A
QUESTION NO: 70
Flash in the Oracle Exadata Database Machine is of lower latency (and enables faster access to data) than: A. Memory
B. Memory and locally attached disk
C. Memory and network-attached disk
D. Locally attached and network-attached disk
Answer: B
Oracle 1z0-515 Data Warehousing 11g Essentials 2/2
Visit the Below Website to access the full version of exam questions for all IT vendors
http://www.free-online-exams.com/
Visit the Below Website to access the full version of exam questions for all IT vendors
http://www.free-online-exams.com
Answer: A,C
Oracle 1z0-515 Data Warehousing 11g Essentials 2/2
See the next post for the rest of the exam questions
Email ayman.rayyan@hotmail.com for a pdf/word version of the questions
All credit to him for compiling this list.
QUESTION NO: 35
Which unique method of improving performance is NOT used by the Oracle Exadata Database Machine?
A. Flash to improve query performance
B. Reduces the amount of data required to flow through I/O
C. Increases the I/O using InfiniBand
D. Performs analysis in a special in-memory database
Answer: D
Explanation: http://techsatwork.com/blog/?p=743
QUESTION NO: 36
You can perform what-if analysis of potential changes with Oracle Warehouse Builder.
A. TRUE
B. FALSE
Answer: A
Explanation:
QUESTION NO: 37
Identify the dimension that appears most often in queries in a data warehouse.
A. Product dimension
B. Time dimension
C. Cost dimension
D. Location dimension
Answer: A
Explanation: http://philip.greenspun.com/sql/data-warehousing.html
QUESTION NO: 38
Which questions CANNOT be addressed by Oracle Data Mining?
A. Fraud detection
B. Prediction of customer behavior
C. Root cause de
D. Identify factors associated with a business problem
Answer: C
Explanation:
QUESTION NO: 39
Which is NOT an available composite partition in Oracle Database 11g?
A. range-list
B. list-list
C. list-range
D. interval-hash
Answer: D
Explanation: http://www.oracle-base.com/articles/11g/PartitioningEnhancements_11gR1.php
QUESTION NO: 40
You are looking to create a RAC cluster to deliver high performance for your client's data warehouse. Which statement is true about a configuration with a few large nodes versus a configuration with n smaller nodes?
A. A few large nodes always perform better than many small nodes.
B. A few large nodes always perform worse than many small nodes.
C. It depends on the workload specifics and the effect of a node failure.
D. Performance should be the same with either option.
Answer: A
Explanation: http://www.oracle.com/us/solutions/datawarehousing/039574.pdf
QUESTION NO: 41
You can use Oracle Data Mining unstructured data.
A. TRUE
B. FALSE
Answer: A
Explanation: http://download.oracle.com/docs/cd/B28359_01/datamine.111/b28129.pdf
QUESTION NO: 42
How can you use Oracle Data Mining with Oracle Warehouse builder?
A. To identify records to extract
B. As a standard transform operation
C. To increase write performance
D. To eliminate ETL logging
Answer: B
Explanation: http://blogs.oracle.com/datamining/
QUESTION NO: 43
You customer wants to segment their customers1 demographic data into those that use and do not use loyalty card. What would you recommend?
A. Use Oracle OLAP Option.
B. Use Oracle SQL Analytic Functions. C. Use classification algorithm in Oracle Data Mining.
C. Use non-negative matrix factorization in Oracle Data Mining.
Answer: C
Explanation:
http://download.oracle.com/docs/cd/B28359_01/datamine.111/b28129/intro_concepts.htm
QUESTION NO: 44
One goal of your Information Lifecycle Management strategy using Oracle's ILM capabilities is to reduce e cost or online storage. Identify two database options that would help in enabling such a strategy.
A. RAC and Advanced Compression
B. RAC and Partitioning
C. Partitioning and Advanced Compression
D. RAC One and Advanced Compression
Answer: B,D
Explanation:
QUESTION NO: 45
Which can be used in scenario where there are large data loads °f a "me sensitive nature into a data warehouse?
A. Direct path loading
B. External tables for loading flat files
C. Partition exchange loading
D. Any of these are valid for certain situations.
Answer: A
Explanation:
http://download.oracle.com/docs/cd/B19306_01/server.102/b14215/ldr_modes.htm#i1008815
QUESTION NO: 46
How can you implement near real time data integration with Oracle Data Integrator?
A. By accessing Change Data Capture records from logs
B. By using Exchange Partition
C. By mining Oracle UNDO segments
D. By reading operating system logs
Answer: B
Explanation:
QUESTION NO: 47
Your customer wants to determine "market baskets." What do you recommend?
A. Use Oracle OLAP Option.
B. Use Oracle SQL Analytic Functions.
C. Use associations algorithm in Oracle Data Mining.
D. Use regression analysis in Oracle Data Mining
Answer: D
Explanation:http://download.oracle.com/docs/cd/B28359_01/datamine.111/b28129/regress.htm
QUESTION NO: 48
Identify the type of refresh that is NOT supported by materialized views.
A. Deferred
B. Incremental
C. Full
D. Heuristic
Answer: D
Explanation:http://download.oracle.com/docs/cd/B10500_01/server.920/a96520/mv.htm#42135
QUESTION NO: 49
For which task would you NOT use Oracle Data Mining?
A. Predicting customer behavior
B. Associating factors with a business issue
C. Determining associations within a population
D. Reducing the amount of data used in a data warehouse
E. All of the above
Answer: E
Explanation: For All above we can use Oracle Data Mining
http://portal.acm.org/citation.cfm?id=1157021
QUESTION NO: 50
What is the estimated maximum speed of data loads for a Quarter Rack with the Exadata Storage Server?
A. 1 TB/hr
B. 2 TB/hr
C. 4 TB/hr
D. 5 TB/hr
E. It depends on the number of CPUs in the server.
Answer: A
Explanation: http://techsatwork.com/blog/?p=743
QUESTION NO: 51
Your BI tool (for example, Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition Plus, Business Objects and Cognos) will be used to query an Oracle database that includes the Oracle OLAP Option. What does tool generate in submitting queries that might include data stored in relational tables and OLAP cubes?
A. SQL
B. PL/SQL
C. Proprietary API code
D. SQL for relational and proprietary API code for OLAP
Answer: B
Explanation:
QUESTION NO: 52
Data Guard compresses data:
A. Always
B. When using logical standby
C. When using physical standby
D. When catching up after a network failure
Answer: C
Explanation: http://forums.oracle.com/forums/thread.jspa?threadID=886988
QUESTION NO: 53
What are Oracle Data Integrator templates used for?
A. To model SAP applications
B. To define how to transform data
C. As reports to monitor ETL activity
D. None of these
Answer: B
Explanation: http://www.docstoc.com/docs/24079944/Oracle-Data-Integrator-Architecture
QUESTION NO: 54
Your BI tool (for example, Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition Cognos) will be used to query an Oracle database that includes the Oracle BI tool generate in submitting queries that might include data stored in cubes?
A. SQL
B. PIVSQL
C. Proprietary API code
D. SQL for relational and proprietary API code for OLAP
Answer: C
Explanation:
QUESTION NO: 55
How does compression affect resource utilization?
A. Reduces the amount of CPU and disk utilization
B. Increases the amount of CPU and disk utilization
C. Reduces the amount of disk but increases CPU utilization for loading
D. Increases the amount of disk but reduces CPU utilization for loading!
Answer: C
Explanation: http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/tividd/td/ITSMFD/SC32-9065-00/en_US/HTML/ab5w0007.htm
QUESTION NO: 56
Your customer wants to use Database Resource Manager to help ensure consistent performance based on users and operations. In designing this implementation, which limitation CANNOT be imposed through Database Resource Manager?
A. Specifying the maximum number of concurrent operations for a resource group
B. Limiting resource consumption for a resource group
C. Specifying the amount of parallelism for a resource group
D. Limiting access to particular data for a resource group
Answer: A
Explanation:
QUESTION NO: 57
How many Exadata Storage Server cells are there in a Full Rack Exadata database machine configuration that has 8 Database Server nodes?
A. 2
B. 14
C. 16
D. 24
Answer: B
Explanation:
QUESTION NO: 58
Identify the true statement about adaptive parallelism.
A. It Is turned on by default.
B. It is turned off by default.
C. You should always leave the default setting
D. There is no such thing.
Answer: B
Explanation: http://kerryosborne.oracle-guy.com/category/oracle/exadata/page/3/
QUESTION NO: 59
Identify the statement about Oracle OLAP that is NOT true.
A. Oracle OLAP cubes are stored in the Oracle relational database
B. Oracle OLAP uses standard Oracle database security.
C. Meta data for Oracle OLAP is accessible in an external data dictionary
D. Oracle OU\P can be deployed using RAC.
Answer: A
Explanation: http://download.oracle.com/docs/cd/B28359_01/olap.111/b28124/whatsnew.htm
According to the answer; "Oracle OLAP uses standard Oracle database security." is a false
statement and "Meta data for Oracle OLAP is accessible in an external data dictionary" is a correct
statement. But in Oracle documentation, http://download.oracle.com/docs/cd/E11882_01/olap.112/e17123/overview.htm#i1
011393 ; is says "With Oracle OLAP, standard Oracle Database security features are used to
22 secure your multidimensional data.".
QUESTION NO: 60
Identity the true statement about a data warehouse
A. The data warehouse is typically refreshed as often as a transactional system,
B. Data warehouse queries are simpler than OLTP queries.
C. A data warehouse typically contains historical data.
D. Queries against a data warehouse never need summarized information.
Answer: C
Explanation: http://wiki.oracle.com/page/Oracle+OLAP+Terminology-D
QUESTION NO: 61
Identify the statement about ASM that is NOT true.
A. ASM is easier to manage than file systems.
B. ASM delivers the performance of raw partitions.
C. ASM is an extra cost option for Oracle databases.
D. ASM delivers automatic striping and mirroring.
Answer: B
Explanation:http://download.oracle.com/docs/cd/B28359_01/server.111/b31107/asmprepare.htm
QUESTION NO: 62
Which two statements are true about the advantages of using a data warehouse?
A. A data warehouse uses fewer database structures, so access to answers is faster and easier
B. A data warehouse is typically implemented with a different design, making access faster.
C. A data warehouse is optimized for ongoing write activity, making response faster.
D. A data warehouse uses specialized features of the Oracle database, like materialized views and star transformations, making response faster.
Answer: A,D
Explanation:
QUESTION NO: 63
What are two ways in which query performance can be improved with partitioning?
A. Partition pruning
B. Partition optimization
C. Partition compression
D. Partition-wise joins
Answer: A,D
Explanation:
QUESTION NO: 64
Your customer is looking to implement ad-hoc analysis in a data warehouse. Which approach is least likely to be used assuming that the customer does not want the expense of managing view?
A. Star schema
B. Snowflake schema
C. Third normal form schema
D. OLAP
Answer: A
Explanation:
QUESTION NO: 65
You have analyzed your client's workload and the Materialized Views Advisor in Enterprise Manager recommends that you create some materialized views to improve performance. What should you do in order to most simply implement this change?
A. Rewrite all the queries in the application to identify materialized view
B. Rewrite existing queries. New queries will automatically use the views.
C. Respond positively to the Advisor to create the materialized views.
D. Build virtual views on a third normal form schema.
Answer: C
Explanation:
QUESTION NO: 66
A Full Rack Oracle Exadata Database Machine can contain 100 TB of disk space with high performance. How much user data should you conservatively estimate this configuration can hold?
A. 100 TB
B. 75 TB
C. 50 TB
D. 28 TB
E. 20 TB
Answer: A
Explanation:
QUESTION NO: 67
What would you do to compress data in partitions that are frequently updated in Oracle Database 11g?
A. Use Hybrid Columnar Compression.
B. Use Advanced Compression Option.
C. Use Hybrid Partitions.
D. Avoid compressing any data.
Answer: A
Explanation:
http://blogs.oracle.com/datawarehousing/2010/01/new_whitepaper_on_exadata_hybr.html
QUESTION NO: 68
The Analytic Workspace Manager would be used to generate_______.
A. Materialized views
B. Oracle OLAP Option cubes
C. Oracle Data Mining algorithms
D. Oracle SQL Analytic functions
Answer: B
Explanation: http://forums.oracle.com/forums/thread.jspa?threadID=616811
QUESTION NO: 69
Which feature of Oracle Warehouse Builder can be used to help ensure data quality?
A. Data extraction
B. Data profiling
C. Logical mapping
D. Exception reporting
Answer: A
Explanation:
QUESTION NO: 70
Flash in the Oracle Exadata Database Machine is of lower latency (and enables faster access to data) than:
A. Memory
B. Memory and locally attached disk
C. Memory and network-attached disk
D. Locally attached and network-attached disk
Answer: B
Explanation:
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 1 of 64
Question: 1
You located a file created in /home successfully by using the slocate command. You found that
the slocate command could locate that file even after deletion. What could be the possible
solution to stop listing deleted files? (Choose all that apply.)
A. Run updatedb to update the database.
B. Run slocate -u to update the database.
C. Use the locate command instead of slocate.
D. Delete the /var/lib/slocate/slocate.db file because it buffers all search results.
E. Reboot the system so that it will update the kernel memory because the kernel stores all
results in the memory.
Answer: A, B
Question: 2
As an administrator, you mounted the /exports/projects NFS exported directory from a server on a
LAN using the default NFS settings. You find the performance to be low. Which NFS mount
options can you use to increase the performance?
A. set rsize=8192 and wsize=8192.
B. set rsize=32768 and wsize=32768.
C. set wsize=8192 and keep the read packet size at the default.
D. set rsize=8192 and keep the write packet size at the default.
E. set rsize=32768 and keep the write packet size at the default.
F. set wsize=32768 and keep the read packet size at the default.
Answer: A
Question: 3
Two users, bob on station1 and smith on station2, generated a public/private key pair using sshkeygen
to enable password-less secure shell login between them. What would be their next step
to accomplish the task?
A. Copy the private key of bob to station2:~smith and vice versa.
B. Copy the key pair of bob to station2:~smith/.ssh as public and private keys.
C. Copy the private key of bob to station2:~smith/.ssh/authorized_keys and vice versa.
D. Copy the public key of bob to station1:~smith/.ssh/authorized_keys and vice versa.
E. Copy the public key of bob to station2:~smith/.ssh/authorized_keys and vice versa.
Answer: E
Question: 4
Exhibit:
As a Linux administrator, you have to let the users smith and scott manage files and directories in
the /software directory on their own, with full permissions between each other's files. What are the
most essential steps needed to grant them the required privileges? (Choose all that apply.)
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 2 of 64
A. Add SUID on /software.
B. Add 777 permissions on /software.
C. Add u=--- permissions on /software.
D. Add scott as a member of the apps group.
E. Add rwx permissions for the apps group on /software.
Answer: D, E
Question: 5
Exhibit:
A normal user bob logs in from server200 to server1 through telnet and runs the xclock command
but fails with an error message as shown in the Exhibit. What could be the possible reason for the
error?
A. This is because gdm is not started on the machine.
B. This is because of the temporary failure in name resolution.
C. This is because the default X access controls do not permit remote connections.
D. This is because the graphical display manager is not configured to allow TCP connections.
Answer: D
Question: 6
What is the effect of issuing ZZ and ZQ in the vi editor command mode?
A. The command ZZ will zoom in the vi editor command mode and ZQ will zoom out the view.
B. The command ZZ will thrash all changes, whereas ZQ will ask for confirmation before saving.
C. The command ZZ will save changes and exit, whereas ZQ will exit the editor without saving
changes.
D. The command ZZ will exit the editor without saving changes, whereas ZQ will save changes
and exit.
Answer: C
Question: 7
You have logged in as root and have invoked the mount command without any options to mount
the device /dev/hda8 mount /dev/hda8. What does mount do in this context? (Choose two.)
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 3 of 64
A. It checks the /etc/mtab for the required options to mount the device.
B. It checks the /etc/fstab for the required options and the mount point to mount the device.
C. It checks the /etc/inittab for the required options and the mount point to mount the device.
D. It reports an error message "mount point doesn't exist" if the entry for /dev/hda8 doesn't exist
in the /etc/fstab file.
Answer: B, D
Question: 8
Which command would you use to save the name of all the users in your system in alphabetical
order to a newfile file after removing the duplicate entries?
A. cut -f1 -d: /etc/passwd | sort | uniq | > newfile
B. cut -f1 -d: /etc/passwd | sort -d | uniq > newfile
C. cut -f1 -d: /etc/passwd | sort -a | uniq | newfile
D. cut -f1 -d: < /etc/passwd | sort | uniq | less < newfile
Answer: B
Question: 9
Which four statements are true about the find command in Linux? (Choose four.)
A. The user can specify how to process the files.
B. The user can specify where to search (pathname).
C. The user can specify what type of file to search for.
D. The user can specify to perform logical operations on selections.
E. The user can search and replace the contents of files with find.
F. The user cannot find recently added files or directories on the system.
Answer: A, B, C, D
Question: 10
The user smith wants to display the total number of lines that are 4 characters (letters and digits)
long or more from the file1.txt file. Which regular expression or command should smith use?
A. egrep "^[[:alnum:]]{4,}$" file1.txt | wc -l
B. egrep "^[[:alpha:]]{4,}$" file1.txt | wc -l
C. egrep "^[[:alpha:]]{4,}$" file1.txt | wc -w
D. egrep "^[[:alnum:]]{4,}$" file1.txt | wc -c
Answer: A
Question: 11
Match the following shell special characters with their usage:
1) \ a) used in pairs to quote other special characters so they will not be interpreted by the
shell or to embed blanks
2) ' ? b) variable substitution
3) { } ~ c) used to escape the special meaning of the next character
4) $ d) wildcard file name expansion
A. 1-c, 2-b, 3-a, 4-d
B. 1-b, 2-d, 3-c, 4-a
C. 1-c, 2-a, 3-d, 4-b
D. 1-c, 2-a, 3-b, 4-d
E. 1-d, 2-a, 3-c, 4-b
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 4 of 64
F. 1-d, 2-c, 3, b, 4-a
Answer: C
Question: 12
Match the commands with their functions:
1. make a. installs the software to the target directory specified during configure, but
typically defaults to /usr/local/subtree
2. configure script b. calls the compiler and linker as specified by the Makefile
3. make install c. creates the necessary Makefiles based on the user information
A. 1-c, 2-a, 3-b
B. 1-b, 2-c, 3-a
C. 1-a, 2-c, 3-b
D. 1-c, 2-b, 3-a
Answer: B
Question: 13
You have the /tools directory on a system with critical system files reserved for future use. As a
Linux administrator which command would you use to protect these files from a user who might
get the UID or GID as shown below?
[root@server1 ~]# ls -ld /tools/
drwxrwx--- 108 517 527 4096 Mar 26 20:00 /tools/
A. chmod o+t /tools
B. chmod u+s /tools
C. chown -R 0.0 /tools
D. chown -R nobody.nobody /tools
Answer: C
Question: 14
Identify the two main branches from the UNIX family tree, where the cross-pollination between
these branches was responsible for making UNIX so powerful. (Choose two.)
A. MIT
B. GNU
C. BSD
D. POSIX
E. BESYS
F. System V
Answer: C, F
Question: 15
You want to access data relevant to some running processes in the system. Which directory
contains the system information describing the system and processes (for example, PID files)
since the system was booted?
A. /sys
B. /srv
C. /proc
D. /var/run
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 5 of 64
E. /var/lock
Answer: D
Question: 16
Exhibit:
The root user at server1 has connected to server200 using ssh. While trying to execute remote
graphical applications he receives an error as shown in the Exhibit. What could be the possible
solution to get rid of this error and run remote graphical applications safely through ssh? (Choose
all that apply.)
A. Use the -X option with ssh while connecting.
B. Remove the ~/.Xauthority file on both server1 and server200.
C. Set the XAuthLocation parameter correctly in /etc/ssh/ssh_config.
D. Set the X11Forwarding parameter to yes in /etc/ssh/sshd_config.
Answer: A, D
Question: 17
Which command would help you identify and count how many lines have the letter "w" and the
letters (together) in the words.txt file?
A. grep 'w' 'is' words.txt | wc -l
B. grep w words.txt | grep is | wc -l
C. grep w words.txt | grep is | wc -c
D. grep '\.w' '\.is' words.txt | wc -l
Answer: B
Question: 18
Multiple users can share a UNIX machine. This is made possible by the OS by using one user's
idle time to service other users. What is this feature of an operating system identified as?
A. data sharing
B. time sharing
C. one-time initialization
D. light weight kernel threading
E. interrupt driven process handling
Answer: B
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 6 of 64
Question: 19
User scott issued the following command at the bash prompt:
[scott@station1 ~]$read -t15 -n10 -s DAX
What is the purpose of issuing this command?
A. to make the read statement provide 15 seconds to enter up to 10 characters silently (no echo
to terminal) into the $DAX variable
B. to make the read statement provide 15 seconds to enter a minimum of 10 characters echoing
onto the terminal
C. to make the read statement provide 15 seconds to enter a minimum of 10 characters without
echoing onto the terminal
D. to make the read statement provide 15 seconds to enter up to 10 characters, echoing onto to
terminal, into the $DAX variable
Answer: A
Question: 20
Match the following signal values with their description.
1. 9 a. Hangup
2 . 19 b. Terminate the process and dump core
3. 11 c. Kill signal
4. 1 d. Stop the process
A. 1-c, 2-b, 3-a,4-b
B. 1-c, 2-d, 3-b, 4-a
C. 1-d, 2-b, 3-c, 4-a
D. 1-d, 2-a, 3-c, 4-b
Answer: B
Question: 21
Note the command given below:
ls -l | grep hello\.gif
Which statement is true about this command?
A. It will long-list the file hello.gif.
B. It will return an error because an escape character \ is used.
C. It will long-list the files in the hello*gif format from the current working directory.
D. It will long-list the hello.gif, hello-gif files or any file in the hello? gif format.
Answer: D
Question: 22
Identify the two true statements about FTP servers. (Choose two.)
A. FTP servers typically listen on port 21.
B. FTP servers typically listen on port 20.
C. FTP servers send data to clients on port 21.
D. FTP servers send data to clients on port 20.
E. FTP servers do not provide anonymous login by default.
Answer: A, D
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 7 of 64
Question: 23
A new user smith wants to customize the bourne shell by creating a new alias for the ls -l
command. He wants to make the new alias persistent across logouts and also reboots. What
could be done to make the new alias persistent only for smith?
A. Add the new alias to ~/.bashrc.
B. Add the new alias to ~/.profile.
C. Add the new alias to /etc/profile.
D. Add the new alias to ~/bash_profile.
Answer: B
Question: 24
The user scott tries to create a directory hierarchy and encounters the
following error:
[scott@server1 tmp]$ mkdir test/test1/stored/all
mkdir: cannot create directory `test/test1/stored/all`: No such file or directory
[scott@server1 tmp]$pwd /tmp
Which two commands can the user scott use to create the directory hierarchy successfully?
(Choose two.)
A. mkdir /test/test1/stored/all
B. mkdir -p test/test1/stored/all
C. mkdir -r test/test1/stored/all
D. mkdirhier /test/test1/stored/all
E. mkdir -r /tmp/test/test1/stored/all
F. mkdirhier /tmp/test/test1/stored/all
Answer: B, F
Question: 25
Examine the following output:
[root@station1]ps -f
UID PID PPID C STIME TTY TIME CMD
root 3944 3820 1 03:32 tty1 01:57 -bash
root 3984 3944 0 03:32 tty1 01:57 ksh
root 3985 3984 0 03:32 tty1 01:57 ps -f
Which columns would you analyze to find the most recently invoked shell?
A. Analyze only the PID.
B. Analyze only the UID.
C. Analyze only the PPID.
D. Analyze both the UID and PID.
E. Analyze both the PID and PPID.
F. Analyze both the UID and PPID.
Answer: E
Question: 26
As root you have changed the default login shell to one of the shells listed in /etc/shells file.
Which file entry is modified as a result of this?
A. /etc/shadow
B. /etc/shells
C. /etc/passwd
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 8 of 64
D. /etc/default/useradd
Answer: C
Question: 27
Exhibit:
The shell script is executed using the default shell interpreter with the input as w. What will be the
output of the script based on this input?
A. It will print the current date and time.
B. It will list all the currently logged in users.
C. It will show that the input is not a valid option.
D. It will print the currently logged in users, current date, and time.
E. It will not show any result because the case block is terminated with an esac.
Answer: C
Question: 28
Which command gives the following output?
Date 03/12/2007, Time 12:00:01 AM
A. echo "Date date +%x , Time date +%r "
B. echo "Date `date +%x` , Time `date +%r` "
C. echo "Date `date +%r` , Time `date +%x` "
D. echo "Date `time +%x` , Time `time +%r` "
Answer: B
Question: 29
Which three statements are true about screen? (Choose three.)
A. screen has the ability to lock a terminal.
B. screen has the ability to monitor a session.
C. screen windows do not adhere to vt100 standards.
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 9 of 64
D. All windows in a screen are dependent on each other.
E. Each window in a screen has its own scroll-back buffer.
Answer: A, B, E
Question: 30
Which statements are true about the File Extensions? (Choose all that apply.)
A. File extensions are just part of the file name.
B. File extensions are cared by all applications.
C. File content depends upon the file extensions.
D. File extensions do not always say what the file is.
E. File extensions have no special meaning to the kernel.
Answer: A, D, E
Question: 31
As root user you have set the environment variable HISTIGNORE="ls:man:pwd:cat" with the
other history-related shell variables at their default. What impact does it have on shell history?
A. History will ignore only the commands listed in the HISTIGNORE variable.
B. History will save only the first occurrence of the commands listed in the HISTIGNORE variable.
C. History will ignore only the commands, issued with any valid switch, listed in the HISTIGNORE
variable.
D. History will save only the first occurrence of the commands, issued with any valid switch, listed
in the HISTIGNORE variable.
Answer: A
Question: 32
Exhibit:
The user smith needs to display the MAC address only of eth0. Which command gives the
desired output?
A. ifconfig eth0 | awk '/eth0/ {print $0}'
B. /sbin/ifconfig eth0 | awk '/HW/ {print $4}'
C. /sbin/ifconfig eth0 | awk '/HW/ {print $5}'
D. /sbin/ifconfig eth0 | awk '/eth0/ {print $4}'
Answer: C
Question: 33
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 10 of 64
View the Exhibit and note the permissions and ownerships of the /sysdir directory.
What could be done to let the user scott write to and copy files from the directory without listing
others files and without compromising the security of the directory?
A. Add rwx to others permissions of the /sysdir directory.
B. Add scott as a member of the admins group and set permissions to 700 on the /sysdir
directory.
C. Add scott as a member of the admins group and set the group permissions wx for the /sysdir
directory.
D. Add scott as a member of the admins group and set the group permissions rx for the /sysdir
directory.
Answer: C
Question: 34
The user smith has logged in to the system and his current working directory is /tmp. Which
command changes the user current working. Which command changes the user's current
working directory to the user's home directory? (Choose all that apply.)
A. cd
B. cd ..
C. cd ~
D. cd ../~
E. cd /home
F. cd $HOME
Answer: A, C, F
Question: 35
The user smith executes the following command:
awk -F: '/bash$/ {nlines++; print $1;} END {print "\n", nlines}' /etc/passwd.
What could be the purpose of using this command?
A. to print all lines in /etc/passwd that ends with bash
B. to print the name of all normal users in /etc/passwd
C. to print and count the names of the users who use the bash shell
D. to print the total number of lines in /etc/passwd that ends with bash
Answer: C
Question: 36
You want to customize the default background color in an X window system using command-line
options. What would you do to achieve this task?
A. Edit the ~/.xinitrc file.
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 11 of 64
B. Edit the ~/.Xdefaults file.
C. Edit the ~/.Xresources file.
D. Edit the ~/.Xauthority file.
Answer: B
Question: 37
A printer has been configured on a Linux box in a heterogeneous network using CUPS. A user
sends a print job from a WINDOWS machine. Identify the statement that holds true in this
scenario.
A. The user will not able to print because he/she is on a non-UNIX system.
B. The user will not able to print because the printer is configured using CUPS.
C. The user will be able to print because the printer follows the IPP standard.
D. The user will not be able to print because WINDOWS does not support CUPS by default.
Answer: C
Question: 38
smith is trying to send a message to the local user bob using the write
command and he receives an error as shown below:
[smith@station2 ~]$write bob
Write: bob has messages disabled
[smith@station2 ~]$
What could be done to overcome the error?
A. bob should set the logged in terminal to the tty group.
B. bob should enable talk and ntalk on his system.
C. bob should accept messages using the mesg y command.
D. smith should indicate the terminal on which bob is logged in.
Answer: C
Question: 39
User smith on station2 is trying to chat with the remote user bob on station1 using the talk
command. smith receives an error message as shown below:
[smith@station2 ~]$talk bob@station1.example.com
[No connection yet]
[ Error on read from talk daemon: Connection refused ]
[smith@station2 ~]$
What can the root user do to resolve the issue? (Choose two.)
A. let smith retry talk by reading from STDIN and sending to bob
B. let smith retry talk after changing the group of talk command to tty
C. let smith retry the talk request with UDP port 518 open on both systems
D. let smith retry talk after restarting the xinetd service with ntalk enabled on both systems
E. let smith retry talk after restarting the network service with the UDP port 517 blocked on both
systems
Answer: C, D
Question: 40
What are the improvements of vim over vi? (Choose all that apply.)
A. multi-level undo
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 12 of 64
B. online help system
C. command-line completion
D. multiple windows and buffers
E. supports using arrow keys in command mode
F. search and replace operations in command mode
Answer: A, B, C, D
Question: 41
Match the following file redirection operators with their functions:
1) < a) redirects STDOUT to a file (overwrite)
2) > b) redirects STDIN from a file
3) >> c) redirects both STDOUT and STDERR
4) 2> d) redirects STDOUT to a file (append)
5) 2>> e) redirects STDERR to a file (overwrite)
6) &> f) redirects STDERR to a file (append)
7) 2>&1 g) redirects both STDOUT and STDERR
A. 1-b, 2-a, 3-d, 4-e, 5-f, 6-c, 7-g
B. 1-b, 2-e, 3-f, 4-a, 5-d, 6-g, 7-c
C. 1-c, 2-e, 3-f, 4-a, 5-d, 6-b, 7-g
D. 1-c, 2-a, 3-d, 4-f, 5-e, 6-g, 7-b
E. 1-b, 2-a, 3-d, 4-f, 5-e, 6-c, 7-g
F. 1-b, 2-e, 3-d, 4-a, 5-f, 6-c, 7-g
Answer: A
Question: 42
The /data directory that belongs to the apps group is set with 1770 permissions. The details of the
apps group members are given below.
# groups smith bob scott
smith : smith apps
scott : scott apps
bob : bob apps
What are the effective permissions for each of these users on other users' files and directories in
the /data directory?
A. Read, write, and execute permissions on files and directories.
B. Read permission on files and read and execute permissions on directories.
C. Read and write permissions on files and read, write, and execute permissions on directories.
D. Read permissions only because full permission is set to the owner of the files and directories
only.
Answer: B
Question: 43
As root you have issued the following command :
[root@station2]# rpmbuild --rebuild sendmail-8.12.8-9.80.src.rpm
What does the rpmbuild command do? (Choose two.)
A. It builds the sendmail source package.
B. It only installs the binary software produced from the sendmail source package.
C. It only compiles the binary software produced from the sendmail source package.
D. It does both the compilation and installation of the binary software produced from the sendmail
source package.
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 13 of 64
Answer: A, D
Question: 44
You want to check any particular user is consuming a large amount of CPU. Which command
would you use to check the CPU used by a user?
A. w
B. who
C. free
D. users
E. finger
Answer: A
Question: 45
You have issued the following command:
mkdir -p test/a{dax,connor,bryan}g/vo{in,out,tmp}
Which of the following directories will it create? (Choose all that apply.)
A. test/voin/adaxg
B. test/adaxg/voout
C. test/aconnorg/voin
D. test/adaxnnorg/voinout
E. test/aconnoyang/vointmp
Answer: B, C
Question: 46
The root user on your system has issued the ln -s file1.txt file2.txt command. Which two
statements are true? (Choose two.)
A. file2.txt will have 777 permissions.
B. file1.txt will be symbolically linked to file2.txt.
C. file2.txt will be symbolically linked to file1.txt.
D. file2.txt and file1.txt will have the same inode number.
E. file2.txt and file1.txt should exist on the same file system.
Answer: A, C
Question: 47
View the Exhibit and note the directory hierarchy.
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 14 of 64
How would you delete the /test1 directory hierarchy? (Choose all that apply.)
A. rm -rf /test1
B. rmdir -r /test1
C. rmdir -p /test1
D. rm -d /test1/hello/fine/documents
E. rm -rf /test1/hello/fine/documents
F. rmdir -p /test1/hello/fine/documents
Answer: A, F
Question: 48
What would be the default permissions on files and directories created by a user with umask
027?
A. Files will have 640 permissions and directories will have 750 permissions.
B. Files will have 639 permissions and directories will have 750 permissions.
C. Files and directories will have 000 permissions because 027 is not a valid umask.
D. Files and directories will have default permissions as of the default umask because 027 is not
a valid umask.
E. Files will have 666 permissions and directories will have 777 permissions because 027 is not a
valid umask.
Answer: A
Question: 49
Observe the following while loop:
while true
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 15 of 64
do
echo " Welcome"
sleep 5
done
What does the while statement do in the script when the condition is true?
A. It executes the echo command 5 times with a sleep time of 5 minutes.
B. It executes the echo command infinitely with a sleep time of 5 minutes.
C. It executes the echo command 5 times with a sleep time of 5 seconds.
D. It executes the echo command infinitely with a sleep time of 5 seconds.
Answer: D
Question: 50
Which command is used for compilation when installing software from the source code?
A. make
B. install
C. ./configure
D. make install
Answer: A
Question: 51
The user smith has issued the command:
cut -f1,3 -d: /etc/passwd | tr a-z A-Z > file1.txt
What could be the purpose of using this command?
A. to map the username, UID, GID on the system in uppercase to file1.txt
B. to map the username along with UIDs on the system in uppercase to file1.txt
C. to map the username, UID, passwords on the system in lowercase to file1.txt
D. to map the username along with passwords on the system in uppercase to file1.txt
Answer: B
Question: 52
What is the minimum number of disk partitions required to have a successful Linux installation?
A. 2 (two)
B. 4 (four)
C. 1 (one)
D. 3 (three)
Answer: C
Question: 53
Which statements are true about a process? ( Choose all that apply.)
A. It is associated with a nice value.
B. It is associated with a Process ID (PID).
C. It does not inherit the environment from the parent process that spawns it.
D. It uses only RAM irrespective of the amount of memory available in the system.
E. Each process will normally be associated with the UID and GID of the user that launched the
program.
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 16 of 64
Answer: A, B, E
Question: 54
Identify the program that runs with the real and effective UID and GID of the switched user when
you switch from one user to another using su command.
A. a logout script
B. the id command
C. an interactive shell
D. the login command
E. the chroot command
Answer: C
Question: 55
You are planning to add the new printer1 print queue and also want to make it the default print
queue. Which of the following two commands would help you achieve the task? (Choose two.)
A. lpadmin -d printer1.
B. lpadmin -x printer1.
C. lpadmin -p printer1 -E parallel:/dev/lp0.
D. lpadmin -p printer1 -E -v parallel:/dev/lp0.
Answer: A, D
Question: 56
Match the following Linux kernel virtual hierarchies with their content:
1) /proc a) Per process information directories and other tunables
2) /sys b) RAM drive for POSIX shared memory operations
3) /dev/pts c) Kernel object data structures
4) /dev/shm d) Auto-ownership of terminals (ttys)
A. 1-a, 2-c, 3-d, 4-b
B. 1-b, 2-a, 3-d, 4-c
C. 1-a, 2-b, 3-d, 4-c
D. 1-b, 2-a, 3-c, 4-d
Answer: A
Question: 57
What would be the output of the nested for loop given below?
for (( i=1; i<=5; i++))
do
for (( j=1; j<=5; j++))
do
echo -n "$i"
done
echo ####
done
A. 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 17 of 64
B. 1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
C. 5 4 3 2 1
5 4 3 2 1
5 4 3 2 1
5 4 3 2 1
5 4 3 2 1
D. 5 5 5 5 5
4 4 4 4 4
3 3 3 3 3
2 2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1 1
Answer: A
Question: 58
Which statement is true about a normal user created with UID less than 500?
A. The user will not have an interactive login shell.
B. The user will have the privilege to mount and unmount file systems.
C. The user account can be used only for system service-related tasks.
D. The user will have all normal user features like home directory, shell, and so on, by default.
E. The user will be restricted from logging in to the system because the UID < 500 is reserved for
system users or pseudo accounts.
Answer: D
Question: 59
You want to archive a directory and its subdirectories (excluding a list of subdirectories from a
file) using the tar command. Which option would help you to do this?
A. -F
B. -X
C. -C
D. --exclude
Answer: B
Question: 60
Exhibit:
What is the output of the shell script when executed at the bash shell?
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 18 of 64
A. 1
22
333
4444
B. 1
12
123
1234
C. 4444
333
22
1
D. 1234
123
12
1
Answer: A
Question: 61
As a root user you execute the commands as shown below:
[root@station1]# a=$((10 % 4 + 6 * 2))
[root@station1]# echo $a
What would be the output of the echo statement?
A. 2
B. 12
C. 14
D. 10
Answer: C
Question: 62
You executed the following command to verify the integrity of sendmail:
[root@station1 ~]# rpm -Va sendmail
.......T. c /etc/mail/sendmail.cf
S.5....T. c /var/log/mail/statistics
[root@station1 ~]#
What do infer about the /var/log/mail/statistics file from the output?
A. The permissions, user ownership, and file type have changed.
B. The permissions, group ownership and file type have changed.
C. The user ownership, group ownership and file type have changed.
D. The MD5 signature, file size, and modification time have changed.
Answer: D
Question: 63
You have the copy of all the rpms in the /RPMS directory on your local Linux machine. After
logging in as root and changing to the /RPMS directory, you try to install the mysql package using
the rpm command. You end up with an error message as shown below:
Error: Failed dependencies: Perl(DBI) is needed by mysql.
How would you overcome this error and install mysql successfully by resolving the
dependencies?
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 19 of 64
A. by installing the software using rpm with the -F option
B. by installing the software using rpm with the --aid option
C. by installing the software using rpm with the --force option
D. by installing the software using rpm with the --nodeps option
Answer: B
Question: 64
Exhibit:
As bob you have logged in at the tty1 terminal and run the commands as shown in the Exhibit.
You want to list the background jobs in the current terminal and issue the jobs command. Which
statement is true in this context?
A. The plus sign indicates the previous job.
B. The plus sign indicates the last stopped job.
C. Only the job with a minus sign can be made to run in the foreground again.
D. Only the job with a plus sign can be made to run in the foreground again.
Answer: B
Question: 65
You have opened three terminals and the Firefox browser at Graphical User Interface (GUI). How
can you ensure that the same applications and windows start on your next login to GUI?
A. While logging out, save the settings in the ~/.Xresources file.
B. While logging out, use the hot key, [Control] + [Alt] + [Backspace].
C. While logging out, use the kill command with signal 12 to kill gdm-binary.
D. While logging out by selection, log out from the action menu. Click the save current setup
option.
Answer: D
Question: 66
The user smith, whose primary group is smith, would like to create a file in his home directory,
which belongs to the group apps. Which two statements are correct? (Choose two.)
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 20 of 64
A. SGID should be set on the destination directory to let users create files that belong to the
group other than their primary group.
B. The user smith could create a file that belongs to the apps group only if his private group is the
apps group as per /etc/group.
C. The user smith could use the newgrp command to log in to the apps group and his private
group will be changed to apps group for a particular session if his name is listed in /etc/group
as a member of apps group.
D. The user smith could use the newgrp command to log in to the apps group, but a password is
required to change his private group to apps group for a particular session if his name is not
listed in /etc/group as a member of apps group.
Answer: C, D
Question: 67
Which system help facility gives the help page exactly as using -k switch with man?
A. info
B. whatis
C. apropos
D. --help option with the command
Answer: C
Question: 68
Where do the manual (man) pages for all commands reside in the File System Hierarchy (FSH)?
A. /usr/share/man
B. /usr/share/info/man
C. /usr/man/share/locale
D. /usr/share/locale/man
Answer: A
Question: 69
Match the mpage options with their functionalities.
1. mpage -r a. toggle printing on both sides of the paper (duplex mode)
2. mpage -t b. print in landscape mode instead of the default portrait
3. mpage -l c. reverse the order in which the pages are printed
A. 1-c, 2-a, 3-b
B. 1-b, 2-c, 3-a
C. 1-c, 2-b, 3-a
D. 1-b, 2-a, 3-c
Answer: A
Question: 70
What are the extra features that the Bourne Again Shell (bash) has compared to the Bourne Shell
(sh)? (Choose all that apply.)
A. background exit status
B. read values from the terminal
C. combine STDOUT and STDERR
D. file name completion and command history
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 21 of 64
E. allows functions and variables with the same name
F. expansion of positional parameters beyond $9 with ${num}
Answer: D, E, F
Question: 71
Match the following arguments with their actions when used with the find command:
1) -print a) Allows a command to be run against each matching file
2) -ls b) Is the default action and displays matches
3) -exec c) Displays full details on matches
4) -ok d) Can be used when you want a confirmation prompt
A. 1-b, 2-c, 3-a, 4-d
B. 1-b, 2-a, 3-d, 4-c
C. 1-c, 2-a, 3-b, 4-d
D. 1-c, 2-d, 3-a, 4-b
Answer: A
Question: 72
Which statement is true about the privileges granted to a user with the UID of 0?
A. The system ignores privileges to modify software installed on the system.
B. Privileges are granted as per the permissions set on every file and device known to the
system.
C. Privileges are granted only to read most of the configuration files and documentation files in
the system directories, not modify them.
D. The system ignores all permissions when responding to commands from the user and
provides read and write permissions to every file and device known to the system.
Answer: D
Question: 73
Exhibit:
As the user bob, you list all the background jobs using the jobs command. You want to bring the
last job stopped into the foreground. Which three commands would you use to achieve this task?
(Choose three.)
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 22 of 64
A. fg
B. %2
C. %3
D. %1
E. fg 2
F. fg 3
G. fg 1
Answer: A, C, F
Question: 74
Why is a Linux operating system always developed and released under a common standard
known as Linux Standard Base (LSB)?
A. to avoid interoperability
B. to avoid POSIX Compliance
C. to ensure application-level diversity
D. to ensure compatibility among distributions
Answer: D
Question: 75
Match the following Regular Expression Character classes with their class descriptions:
1) [:alnum:] a) match all control characters
2) [:alpha:] b) match all printable characters (not including space)
3) [:graph:] c) match all letters and digits
4) [:print:] d) match all letters
5) [:cntrl:] e) match all printable characters
A. 1-d, 2-c, 3-b, 4-e, 5-a
B. 1-c, 2-d, 3-e, 4-a, 5-b
C. 1-d, 2-c, 3-e, 4-b, 5-a
D. 1-c, 2-d, 3-b, 4-e, 5-a
Answer: D
Question: 76
As user smith you want the CPU utilization of all the users logged on to server1 server. You want
the information available automatically as soon as you login to the bash login shell and want the
information available only to smith. What would you do on server1, which has all the default shell
configuration files, to accomplish the task?
A. Add the w command to ~/.profile file.
B. Add the who command to ~/.profile file.
C. Add the w command to ~/.bash_profile file.
D. Add the who command to ~/.bash_profile file.
Answer: C
Question: 77
A normal user bob wants to get into the graphical mode and executes the startx command.
Identify the statement that holds true in this context.
A. The system switches to run level 5.
B. The user is taken into the graphical mode without being prompted for a password.
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 23 of 64
C. The user is taken into the graphical mode and the system prompts for a password to log in.
D. The user is taken into the graphical mode and the system continues in the old run level and
prompts for a password for the user to log in.
Answer: B
Question: 78
You have executed the following command as root user:
find /home | cpio -o -H tar -F root@stationX:/dev/nst0 --rsh-command=/usr/bin/ssh
What could be the purpose of issuing this command?
A. to archive the contents of the /home directory to the remote machine's tape drive
B. to archive the contents of the /home directory in tar format to a remote machine's tape drive
C. to archive the contents of the /home directory in cpio format to a remote machine's tape drive
D. to archive the contents of the /home directory in cpio and tar format to a remote machine's
tape drive
Answer: B
Question: 79
As a Linux system administrator you want to check and print the names of the users having UID >
500, and are not using the bash or csh shell. Which two commands would help you to do so?
(Choose two.)
A. awk -F: '/([^(bash|csh)])$/ {if ($3 >500) print $1}' /etc/passwd
B. awk -F: '/([(bash)]|[(csh)])$/ {if ($3 >500) print $1}' /etc/passwd
C. awk -F: '/([^(bash)]|[^(csh)])$/ {if ($3 >500) print $1}' /etc/passwd
D. awk -F: '/([^(nologin)]|[^(ksh)])$/ {if ($3 >500)print$2}' /etc/passwd
Answer: A, C
Question: 80
You execute the following two commands at the bash prompt in the same order as shown below:
[root@station2]# myexpr=$((14*18))
[root@station2]# echo $((56+$myexpr))
What would be the output of the echo command?
A. 56
B. 308
C. 252
D. $myexpr
E. $((56+$myexpr))
Answer: B
Question: 81
Match the following Regular Expression Quantifiers with their appropriate values:
1) * a) match 0 or 1 times
2) + b) match exactly n times
3) ? c) match at least n times
4) {n} d) match 0 or more times
5) {n,} e) match 1 or more times
A. 1-e, 2-d, 3-a, 4-c, 5-b
B. 1-d, 2-e, 3-a, 4-b, 5-c
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 24 of 64
C. 1-a, 2-e, 3-d, 4-c, 5-b
D. 1-d, 2-a, 3-e, 4-b, 5-c
Answer: B
Question: 82
As user smith you want to log in to a remote machine in a securely encrypted channel. Which
utility would you use for the purpose?
A. ssh
B. ftp
C. telnet
D. rlogin
Answer: A
Question: 83
The user smith issued the PS1='[\w \d \! \#]'command. What is the purpose of using this
command?
A. to display the date, history number, and a "#" at his shell prompt
B. to display the week day, date, history number, and”#" at his shell prompt
C. to display the command number, date and "#" at his shell prompt along with the working
directory
D. to display the command number and history number of the command, date, and current
working directory at his shell prompt
Answer: D
Question: 84
What would be the output of the nested for loop given below?
for (( i=1; i<=5; i++ ))
do
for (( j=1; j<=i; j++ ))
do
echo -n "$j"
done
echo " "
done
A. 1
12
123
1234
12345
B. 12345
1234
123
12
1
C. 12345
12345
12345
12345
12345
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 25 of 64
D. 12345
1234
123
1234
12345
Answer: A
Question: 85
Match the following variables available to the user that are set internally by the shell, with their
descriptions:
1) $1 - $9 a) process ID of the shell
2) $* b) the string containing all the arguments to the shell
3) $? c) process ID of the last command run in the background
4) $$ d) positional parameters
5) $! e) exit status of the most recently executed command
A. 1-d, 2-a, 3-e, 4-b, 5-c
B. 1-d, 2-c, 3-a, 4-b, 5-e
C. 1-d, 2-b, 3-e, 4-a, 5-c
D. 1-d, 2-a, 3-c, 4-b, 5-e
Answer: C
Question: 86
Identify the feature that is common to both the GNOME and KDE desktops.
A. Both are themeable.
B. built on the Qt library
C. built on the GTK library
D. Both are created by FSF.
E. Both use metacity as the default window manager.
Answer: A
Question: 87
You have created the user smith on your Linux machine. What is the default location of smith's
mail spool on the machine?
A. ~smith/mbox.
B. /var/mail/spool/smith.
C. /var/spool/smith/mail.
D. /var/mail/smith/spool.
E. /var/spool/mail/smith.
Answer: E
Question: 88
A printer has been connected to the single available port. You execute the following command at
the prompt:
echo "This is a simple test" > /dev/lp0
What can you infer from the command?
A. The text is saved in the /dev/lp0 file.
B. The text is simply echoed on to the standard output device.
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 26 of 64
C. The text will be printed by the printer attached to/dev/lp0.
D. The text will not be printed because the printer has not been mentioned explicitly on the
command line.
Answer: C
Question: 89
The user smith on server1 wants to check the IP address of the machine along with the MAC
address.
View the Exhibit that shows the error message received by smith during this.
Which statement is true in this scenario?
A. He can view the IP address and the MAC address by executing the ip addr command.
B. He cannot execute the command which resides in /sbin where system binaries for root user
reside.
C. He cannot view the IP address and MAC address of the machine because only root user can
list network interfaces.
D. He can view the IP address and the MAC address by giving the absolute path of the command
as /sbin/ifconfig.
Answer: D
Question: 90
The user scott issues the cp -f ~/file1 /tmp/dir2 command. Which of these statements are true
about this command? (Choose all that apply.)
A. The /root/file1 file is copied to the /tmp/dir2 directory.
B. If /tmp/dir2 exists and is a file, it will be overwritten by file1.
C. The file1 file is copied from scott's home directory to /tmp/dir2.
D. If /tmp/dir2 does not exist, ~/file1 will be copied as /tmp/file1.
Answer: B, C
Question: 91
The user smith issued the egrep "^[[:upper:]]" words.txt command. What does this command do?
A. displays all lines in the words.txt file that contains an uppercase letter
B. displays all lines in the words.txt file that begins with an uppercase letter
C. displays all lines in the words.txt file after translating uppercase letters to lowercase
D. displays all lines in the words.txt file after translating lowercase letters to uppercase
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 27 of 64
Answer: B
Question: 92
You have downloaded a DOS-formatted text file through anonymous ftp using binary transfer
mode to your Linux machine. What impact does this have on the downloaded text file?
A. The text file is stripped off the carriage return.
B. The text file is stripped off the line feed character.
C. The text file gets corrupted because of incompatibility in the format.
D. The text file does not undergo any processing because of the binary transfer mode.
Answer: D
Question: 93
Your system is running in text-based mode. During the next reboot, you want it to directly boot
into the graphical mode. How would you achieve this task?
A. Edit the configuration file /etc/inittab and change the default run level to 5.
B. Edit the configuration file /etc/inittab and change the default run level to 3.
C. Edit the configuration file /etc/inittab and change the default run level to 1.
D. Edit the configuration file /etc/inittab and change the default run level to 6.
Answer: A
Question: 94
The user bob on station1 wants to chat using talk with smith on station2 in the same network.
Identify the statement that holds true in this scenario.
A. smith has to respond to bob only from station2.
B. smith can respond to bob from any machine within the network.
C. bob can use only the login name to send a message to smith using talk.
D. bob can use talk to chat with only the locally logged-in users on station1.
Answer: B
Question: 95
Which commands, without any options, could help a user to read the entire contents of a text file
in his or her home directory? (Choose two.)
A. xxd
B. less
C. grep
D. head
E. more
F. strings
Answer: B, E
Question: 96
You have opened a file called newfile.txt in the vi editor and in command mode, you enter :0,$
s/hello/init/g. What could be the purpose of issuing this command?
A. to replace the word hello with the word init globally in the newfile.txt file
B. to replace the word init with the word hello globally in the newfile.txt file
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 28 of 64
C. to delete all the lines containing the word hello and init in the newfile.txt file
D. to replace the word hello with the word init from the cursor position in the newfile.txt file
Answer: A
Question: 97
The /projects directory is being shared by server1 with the share name datashare through samba.
To access the shared directory as bob you issue the following command:
smbclient //server1/datashare -U 'bob%foouser'
What happens when you execute the command?
A. All the samba shares on server1 will be displayed.
B. bob will be prompted for a password to access the share.
C. All the shares on server1 accessible to bob will be displayed.
D. The share will be accessed with the credentials of bob without being prompted for a password.
Answer: D
Question: 98
Which two statements are true about Regular Expressions? (Choose two.)
A. They are build upon expressions that match multiple characters.
B. They can be used only by commands, not programming languages.
C. They help most characters, letters, and numbers match themselves.
D. They supports "<" and ">" at the beginning and end of sentences only.
E. They accept text patterns from STDIN, from a network connection or from a user supplied
input.
Answer: C, E
Question: 99
Which statements are true about a source RPM? (Choose all that apply.)
A. Source RPM cannot be used to build a binary rpm.
B. Source RPMs can be compiled and installed directly.
C. Source RPMs allow to customize the package for a particular CPU.
D. Source RPM does not contain information about how to install the software.
Answer: B, C
Question: 100
You want a script to be automatically run for the default graphical desktop as soon as you log in.
What would you do to achieve this task?
A. Go to Applications > System Tools > Task Scheduler and add the absolute path of the script.
B. Go to Applications > System Settings > Add/Remove Applications and add the absolute path
of the script.
C. Go to Applications > Preferences >More Preferences->Preferred Applications and add the
absolute path of the script.
D. Go to Applications > Preferences > More Preferences > Sessions and add the absolute path of
the script in Startup programs.
Answer: D
Question: 101
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 29 of 64
You have logged in as the root user into run level 3. What happens if you execute the xinit
command?
A. The system changes to runlevel 5.
B. The system changes to runlevel 4.
C. The system continues to run in runlevel 3.
D. The system changes to runlevel 1 (single).
Answer: C
Question: 102
Identify the shareable directories according to File system Hierarchy Standard (FHS). (Choose all
that apply.)
A. /etc
B. /usr
C. /var/run
D. /var/lock
E. /var/mail
F. /etc/sysconfig
Answer: B, E
Question: 103
Exhibit:
Identify the files that are hard linked to each other, from the Exhibit.
A. a.txt and b.txt
B. b.txt and newfile
C. file1.txt and file2.txt
D. file1.txt and config.txt
E. a.txt ,b.txt and newfile
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 30 of 64
Answer: A
Question: 104
You have a file named newbackup on the server1.example.com server. To download the file
through lftp as user bob, you issued the following command:
[bob@station2 ~]$ lftp ftp.server1.example.com/pub/> get newbackup & After a while, before the
download is completed, you quit lftp. Which statement about lftp holds true in this context?
A. It will continue to run in the background but stops downloading the file.
B. It ignores th quit signal and continues the download until it completes it.
C. It will continue to run in the background until the entire file has been downloaded.
D. It will run as a foreground process until the file is downloaded completely and then quits.
Answer: C
Question: 105
You have issued the following command:
echo -e "Welcome\nTo Oracle\nEnterprise\rLinux"
Why would you use the -e switch? (Choose two.)
A. to redirect the output to the standard output device
B. to remove the normal newline character from the end of the output
C. to cause echo to honor the escape sequence for the carriage return
D. to cause echo to honor the escape sequence for both the newline characters
Answer: C, D
Question: 106
Which two statements are true about the init process? (Choose two.)
A. Process ID (PID) of init is always 0.
B. The first process spawned by the kernel is init.
C. init uses the exec() method to spawn a new process.
D. init reads the /etc/inittab file to load the default run level.
Answer: B, D
Question: 107
Which statements are true about xauth? (Choose all that apply.)
A. It stores all tokens in a file on the system.
B. It must be available to use X11 forwarding.
C. It distributes token on a host-by-host basis.
D. It can be used to control token-based access control.
E. It is not possible to install just xauth without installing the entire X server.
Answer: A, B, D
Question: 108
You executed the following command on a Linux machine:
sed s/hello/fun/g file1.txt | tr A-z -Z> file2.txt
What three things would this command do? (Choose three.)
A. Save all changes to file2.txt.
B. Translate all uppercase characters to lowercase.
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 31 of 64
C. Translate all lowercase characters to uppercase.
D. Modifies file1.txt and creates file2.txt.
E. Replace all occurrences of the entry hello with the entry fun.
F. Replace all occurrences of the entry fun with the entry hello.
Answer: A, C, E
Question: 109
You have the ps program and several child processes running in the tty1 terminal. What signal
will the child processes receive if the tty1 terminal is killed?
A. HUP
B. SIGINT
C. SIGSTOP
D. SIGTERM
Answer: A
Question: 110
You have logged in to your Linux box as a normal user with the default desktop. After working for
a while, you plan to change your desktop to KDE. How would you change the desktop?
A. by configuring the /etc/X11/prefdm file
B. by configuring the /etc/X11/xorg.conf file
C. by configuring the /etc/sysconfig/desktop file
D. by using the switchdesk command with KDE as the argument
Answer: D
Question: 111
You have logged in at the tty1 terminal on your local machine and want to display all the child
processes that have an associated terminal. Which command would help you achieve this task?
A. ps
B. ps a
C. ps -e
D. ps -a
Answer: D
Question: 112
Which statements are correct about a command shell? (Choose all that apply.)
A. It initializes synchronous interrupts.
B. It enables task automation using scripts.
C. It handles all communications with devices attached to the system.
D. It handles interaction between the user and the kernel when a user is operating at the
command line.
Answer: B, D
Question: 113
You have executed the following command:
find . -name "prg.conf" -exec chmod o+r '{}' \;
What is the expected output of this command?
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 32 of 64
A. Locate all the files named prg.conf in the current working directory and add execute
permissions for others on them.
B. Locate all the files named prg.conf only in the current working directory and process them by
using the chmod o+r command.
C. Locate all the files named prg.conf in the current working directory and its subdirectories and
add read permission for others.
D. Locate all the files named prg.conf in the current working directory and subdirectories and add
execute permissions for others on them.
Answer: C
Question: 114
While using the vi editor in command mode, which key sequences will delete six words? (Choose
all that apply.)
A. d6w
B. 6dw
C. dw6
D. wd6
E. 6dd
Answer: A, B
Question: 115
Exhibit:
What are the privileges granted to the user smith on the /tmp/backup directory?
A. He can only list the contents of /tmp/backup.
B. He can only navigate to the /tmp/backup directory.
C. He can change to and copy contents from the /tmp/backup directory.
D. He can only change to and from the /tmp/backup directory but cannot list its contents.
Answer: A
Question: 116
As a normal user on a Linux system, you are trying to execute the /bin/ls command. What
happens when you execute the command at the shell prompt?
A. The shell executes the program, sets a priority value of -19, and waits for the system calls from
the kernel.
B. The shell passes asynchronous interrupts to the kernel and returns to the prompt waiting to
display the output.
C. The shell executes the program, breaks memory into small chunks called pages, and initializes
a system call to the kernel.
D. The shell makes a system call asking the kernel to start the command as a child process and
goes to sleep, waits for the command to finish.
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 33 of 64
Answer: D
Question: 117
Match the following utilities with their functionalities.
1. ghostscript a. converts text to Postscript
2. enscript b. formats output to print several document pages on one printer page
3. mpage c. Postscript renderer that can convert between Postscript and many other formats
A. 1-a, 2-c, 3-b
B. 1-a, 2-b, 3-c
C. 1-c, 2-a, 3-b
D. 1-c, 2-b, 3-a
Answer: C
Question: 118
Exhibit:
Which option with the mkdir command would print a message for each created directory as
shown in the Exhibit?
A. The option m alone
B. The options m and p
C. The options p and v
D. The options m and v
Answer: C
Question: 119
You are writing a script and add the following line at the beginning of the script:
#!/bin/bash
What implications does this have on the shell script if the script is called directly at the c shell
prompt?
A. The script will treat the line as a comment.
B. The current shell will attempt to parse and execute the script.
C. The script will be executed using bash as the shell interpreter.
D. The script will be executed using bourne as the shell interpreter.
Answer: C
Question: 120
Exhibit:
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 34 of 64
The root user issued the following command on mailqueue.txt shown in the Exhibit:
cat mailqueue.txt | cut -dr -f2- | cut -f2 | cut -d "@" -f2 | sort | uniq | wc -l
What is the purpose of using this command?
A. to count the total number of e-mail addresses in the file
B. to list the e-mail addresses after removing the duplicates
C. to sort the e-mail addresses in mailqueue.txt and print it along with the total number of lines
D. to determine how many different domains are available amongst the e-mail addresses in
mailqueue.txt
Answer: D
Question: 121
Exhibit:
The users smith, scott, and bob are working on a common project and the /projects directory is
assigned to them as the common working directory to access using group privileges. The users
report a problem that they are assigned the ownership of whatever files they edit inside the
/projects directory. They also need to have the same level of access control on all files and
directories inside the /projects directory owned by other members of the group. As a Linux
administrator, what would you do to resolve this error and meet the users' requirements?
A. Set SUID alone on the /projects directory.
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 35 of 64
B. Set SGID alone on the /projects directory.
C. Set Sticky bit alone on the /projects directory.
D. Set 2770 permissions on the /projects directory.
E. Set 7777 permissions on the /projects directory.
F. Set 3770 permissions on the /projects directory.
Answer: F
Question: 122
Which three statements are true about tunneling an application through ssh? (Choose three.)
A. Tunneling works by port forwarding.
B. Only one port could be forwarded at a time
C. Tunneling works only if the remote host runs an X server.
D. Tunneling works only if the remote host runs an ssh server.
E. All requests aimed at the local port are forwarded to the remote port via ssh and thus
encrypted.
Answer: A, D, E
Question: 123
As root you execute the following command:
echo "Good\nMorning\nSmith"
You find the two newline characters in the output and do not want them to appear in the output.
Which two among the following would help you achieve this task without effecting the content of
echo command? (Choose two.)
A. echo -e "Good\nMorning\nSmith"
B. echo -n "Good\nMorning\nSmith"
C. echo -E "Good\nMorning\nSmith"
D. echo -ne "Good\nMorning\nSmith"
E. echo -nE "Good\nMorning\nSmith"
F. echo -eE "Good\nMorning\nSmith"
Answer: A, D
Question: 124
Match the print commands with their functionalities.
1. lpq a. printer control program
2. lprm b. Send a job to the queue to be printed.
3. lpr c. Remove a job from the queue.
4. lpc d. View the contents of the queue.
A. 1-a, 2-c, 3-b, 4-d
B. 1-a, 2-b, 3-c, 4-d
C. 1-d, 2-b, 3-c, 4-a
D. 1-d, 2-c, 3-b, 4-a
Answer: D
Question: 125
Match the following rpm options with their functions:
1. -i a. replaces any older versions of a package with the new package
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 36 of 64
2. -U b. upgrades packages, but only if an earlier version exists on your system
3. -F c. uninstalls the specified package
4. -e d. installs a new package
A. 1-d, 2-a, 3-b, 4-c
B. 1-d, 2-b, 3-a, 4-c
C. 1-a, 2-c, 3-b, 4-d
D. 1-a, 2-b, 3-c, 4-d
Answer: A
Question: 126
A normal user sends a print job to the default printer but later finds the print queue is big and
decides to cancel the job. What would the user do to perform this task?
A. The user has no permission to view job numbers using the jobs command and hence cannot
delete the job.
B. The user can know the job number but cannot remove the job as he has no permission to use
the lprm command.
C. The user has to list the job using lpq and remove it using the command lprm with the job
number as the argument.
D. The user has no permission to view job numbers using the lpq command and hence cannot
delete the job.
Answer: C
Question: 127
The Linux file system contains a directory by default on which all users have rwx permissions.
Only the root user has the permission to delete any file created by any user. Identify the directory
and find out why it is so.
A. /tmp, because sticky bit is set on that
B. / (root file system), because of 1777 permissions
C. /home, because home directories will have 770 permissions
D. /usr, because all users will have rwx permissions and sticky bit set on that
E. /home, because no user will have write permission on files owned by others
Answer: A
Question: 128
You use the SUSPEND character to suspend an already running process. Which signal does it
send to the process?
A. SIGINT
B. SIGHUP
C. SIGSTOP
D. SIGTERM
Answer: C
Question: 129
The free command reports slightly less memory than the actual total memory available. Why is it
so?
A. The swap space occupies a portion of the main memory that can never be freed.
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 37 of 64
B. The multiple instances of a program like shell, being run, consumes a portion of the main
memory that cannot be freed.
C. The kernel remains in the main memory while the computer is in operation and the memory it
occupies can never be freed.
D. The zombie processes that exist in the process table occupy a slightly less portion of the main
memory that can only be freed on reboot.
Answer: C
Question: 130
As smith you have logged in to the system at the tty1 terminal and issued the following command
to make the top command run in the background.
[smith@station2 ~]$ top&
You exit from the terminal and log back again in to the system at the same terminal. How is the
background job affected?
A. The background job will not be affected.
B. The background job gets into the foreground as soon as smith logs in to the system.
C. The background job is deleted from the job pool and does not get listed using the jobs
command.
D. The background job starts running in the background again as soon as smith logs in to the
system.
Answer: C
Question: 131
As the root user, you try to log in to station1 from station2 using ssh but fail with an error
message as shown below:
[root@station2]# ssh station1
root@station1's password :
Permission denied, please try again.
root@station1's password :
Permission denied, please try again.
root@station1's password :
Permission denied, (publickey,gssapi-with-mic, password).
[root@station2]#
What could be the possible reason for the error?
A. The sshd service is not running on station2.
B. The sshd service is not running on station1.
C. SSH on station1 is configured to deny root permission.
D. SSH on station2 is configured to deny root permission.
Answer: C
Question: 132
Exhibit:
What would be the output of the script if it is executed using the default shell interpreter?
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 38 of 64
A. Welcome 5 times
Welcome 4 times
Welcome 3 times
Welcome 2 times
Welcome 1 times
Welcome 0 times
B. Welcome 0 times
Welcome 1 times
Welcome 2 times
Welcome 3 times
Welcome 4 times
Welcome 5 times
C. Welcome 1 times
Welcome 2 times
Welcome 3 times
Welcome 4 times
D. Welcome $i times
Answer: B
Question: 133
Exhibit:
You have logged in as bob at the tty1 terminal and want to bring the job with the job number 1 to
the foreground. An error is reported when you execute the %man command to achieve this. What
could be the possible reason for the error?
A. There is no such job with the specified job name.
B. There is more than one job with the same job name.
C. The syntax to bring a background job to the foreground is incorrect.
D. bob does not have the permissions to bring the job from the background to the foreground.
Answer: B
Question: 134
How does the file command report the type of file? (Choose all that apply.)
A. By examining the file contents
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 39 of 64
B. By examining md5 checksum
C. By examining the file extensions
D. By comparing the file extensions with a local database available on the system
E. By examining magic numbers that occur at specific offsets and matching them against known
file types
Answer: A, E
Question: 135
Exhibit:
You have created a user account bob on a Linux machine and, when the user logs in, he has a
broken shell as shown in the Exhibit. As a Linux administrator, what would you do in this situation
to let user bob get rid of this error without compromising his privacy?
A. Change the permissions of /home/bob recursively to 777.
B. Change the permission of /home/bob/.bash_profile to 770.
C. Change the user bob's shell to /bin/bash by editing /etc/passwd.
D. Change the user and group ownership of /home/bob recursively to bob.
Answer: D
Question: 136
Which statement is true about the files and directories created inside the /project directory that
have 2777 permissions?
A. All files and directories will have the same group as that of the /project directory.
B. All files inside the /project directory will have permissions set to 2644 and the subdirectories
will have them set to 2755.
C. All files and directories will have the default group set to the primary group of the user who
creates them in /project directory.
D. All executables inside the /project directory will run with the effective group ID (EGID) of the
group of the /project directory.
Answer: A
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 40 of 64
Question: 137
Observe the following NFS share exported by server1.
[root@server1 ~]$ cat /etc/exports
/data .example.com(ro,root_squash)
You have logged in as root on station1 and try to access the /data NFS share on server1 as root.
Which statement holds true in this context?
A. The access to NFS share will be denied.
B. The NFS share will be accessed with the privileges of nobody.
C. The NFS share will be accessed with the privileges of the root user.
D. The NFS share will be accessed with the privileges of nfsnobody.
Answer: D
Question: 138
Identify the two true statements about screen. (Choose two.)
A. Terminal manager controls each session in a screen.
B. screen windows do not adhere to vt100 standards.
C. All windows in a screen are dependent on each other.
D. Each window in a screen has its own scroll-back buffer.
E. screen allows only one program to run using one terminal.
Answer: A, D
Question: 139
Match the bash file with its description:
File name Description
1. .bash_history a. a list of commands to be executed when you log in
2. .bash_logout b. contains a list of commands that is executed every time you open a new shell
3. .bash_profile c. keeps a list of the commands you have been typing
4. .bashrc d. a list of auto run commands to be executed when you leave the shell
A. 1-c, 2-d, 3-b, 4-a
B. 1-b, 2-c, 3-a, 4-d
C. 1-c, 2-d, 3-a, 4-b
D. 1-b, 2-c, 3-d, 4-a
Answer: C
Question: 140
You have received an email with a file login_remote, which is the HEX dump of a file. View the
Exhibit that shows a portion of this file.
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 41 of 64
How would you revert it to the original form in the name login?
A. By using the cat command with the -t option
B. By using the xxd command with the -r option
C. By using the strings command with the -t option
D. By using the strings command with the -a option
Answer: B
Question: 141
Which two statements are true about the su command? (Choose two.)
A. Switching from super user to super user requires a password.
B. Switching from super user to normal user requires a password.
C. Switching from normal user to super user requires a password.
D. Switching from super user to normal user does not require a password.
E. Switching from normal user to normal user does not require a password.
Answer: C, D
Question: 142
The user smith is asked to replace all occurrences of the letter "e" with the letter "y" in file1.txt
and save the output to fix.txt. Which command would let the user smith do so? (Choose all that
apply.)
A. sed s/e/y file1.txt > fix.txt
B. sed /y/e/g file1.txt > fix.txt
C. sed s/e/y/g file1.txt > fix.txt
D. sed /y/e/g file1.txt > ./fix.txt
E. sed s/e/y/g < file1.txt > ./fix.txt
Answer: C, E
Question: 143
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 42 of 64
Identify the true statement about configure script.
A. It depends on make to create the Makefiles.
B. It creates the necessary Makefiles based on the user information.
C. It creates the required directories and subdirectories on the system.
D. It does not depend on the autoconf tool for the package installation.
Answer: B
Question: 144
Which command could help a user to output the data appended to a text file at the shell prompt,
as the file grows?
A. cat
B. xxd
C. head
D. tail
E. more
F. strings
Answer: D
Question: 145
The root user on server1 is trying to switch to the normal user account scott for testing certain
privileges he has and receives an error as shown below:
[root@server1 ~]# su - scott
This account is currently not available
[root@server1 ~]#
What do you infer from this error?
A. The user scott's account is locked.
B. The user scott has the shell set to /bin/false.
C. The user scott is assigned with a UID below 500.
D. The user scott's account has reached the expiry date.
E. The user scott has the shell set to /sbin/nologin.
F. The user scott does not have a valid UID to get authorized by the system.
Answer: E
Question: 146
Which three statements are true about Local Shell variables? (Choose three.)
A. set by the shell
B. user modifiable
C. accessible by child processes
D. value restricted to a single shell
E. passed to programs started by the shell
Answer: A, B, D
Question: 147
What happens when you execute the lpq command without passing any arguments?
A. It lists all the jobs in the default queue.
B. It lists the jobs in all the available queues.
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 43 of 64
C. It removes all the jobs available in the default queue.
D. It removes the jobs available in all the available queues.
Answer: A
Question: 148
The cut -d: -f 1,3,8 /etc/passwd command is issued on a Linux system. Which statement about
the output is true?
A. It displays an error because /etc/passwd has only seven fields.
B. It displays all the users and the corresponding UIDs from the /etc/passwd file separated by a :
field delimiter.
C. It displays all the users, corresponding GIDs, and login shell from the /etc/passwd file
separated by a : field delimiter.
D. It displays all the users, corresponding UIDs, and login shell from the /etc/passwd file
separated by a : field delimiter.
Answer: B
Question: 149
Match the directories with their contents.
1. BUILD/ a. contains pristine source tarball as well as any patches and other ancillary files
2. SOURCES/ b. contains the package.spec file that describes and controls RPM build
3. RPMS/ c. source tarball is extracted, patches applied, and compilation takes place
4. SPECS/ d. freshly built binary RPMs placed in these directories
A. 1-d, 2-b, 3-a, 4-c
B. 1-c, 2-d, 3-b, 4-a
C. 1-d, 2-c, 3-b, 4-a
D. 1-c, 2-a, 3-d, 4-b
Answer: D
Question: 150
You have the /home/ file system on server1 exported through NFS. You have a fresh installation
of Linux on a workstation and want to setup the workstation to mount and unmount the /home/
filesystem automatically. Which default configuration files on the workstation would you edit to
achieve this task?
A. Edit the /etc/fstab file.
B. Edit the /etc/inittab file.
C. Edit only the /etc/auto.home file.
D. Edit only the /etc/auto.master file.
E. Edit both the /etc/auto.home and /etc/auto.master files.
Answer: E
Question: 151
Exhibit:
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 44 of 64
Which two key combinations will help you edit more than one file at a time in the same terminal
window using vim editor as shown in the Exhibit? (Choose two.)
A. Control+w+w to edit in vertical split windows
B. Control+w+v to edit in vertical split windows
C. Control+w+h to edit in horizontal split windows
D. Control+w+s to edit in horizontal split windows
E. Control+Alt+v to edit in vertical split windows
F. Control+Alt+h to edit in horizontal split windows
Answer: B, D
Question: 152
You have issued the following command:
echo -e welcome\nTo Oracle\nEnterprise\rLinux
What would be the impact of -e switch on the echo command?
A. It honors the escape sequence only for the carriage return.
B. It honors the escape sequence only for the first new line character.
C. It honors the escape sequence only for the two new line characters.
D. It honors the escape sequence only for the second new line character.
E. It honors the escape sequence for both the new line characters and carriage return.
Answer: E
Question: 153
Which three statements are true about the mount command? (Choose three.)
A. It supports labels for mounting.
B. It can be used only by root to mount the local file system.
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 45 of 64
C. By default it can be used by an ordinary user to mount the local file system.
D. It will list all the currently mounted file systems, if executed without any arguments.
E. It will list only the file systems listed in /etc/fstab if executed without any arguments
Answer: A, B, D
Question: 154
UNIX was known as the most stable operating system ever released. Identify two major design
principles that help attain this stability. (Choose two.)
A. easily modifiable end user programs
B. all configuration data stored in binary files
C. entire policy decisions made by the kernel
D. everything in UNIX is either a file or a process
Answer: A, D
Question: 155
Match the following umask values with their effective file and directory permissions.
umask Files Directories
1) 0220 a) 666 777
2) 0000 b) 640 751
3) 0026 c) 600 700
4) 0077 d) 660 770
5) 0007 e) 000 000
6) 0777 f) 446 557
A. 1-b, 2-e, 3-d, 4-f, 5-c, 6-a
B. 1-f, 2-a, 3-b, 4-c, 5-d, 6-e
C. 1-d, 2-a, 3-b, 4-f, 5-c, 6-e
D. 1-f, 2-e, 3-b, 4-c, 5-d, 6-a
E. 1-d, 2-a, 3-f, 4-b, 5-c, 6-e
Answer: B
Question: 156
Exhibit:
Which command would give you the output shown in the Exhibit?
A. grep root /etc/passwd
B. grep -ni root /etc/passwd
C. awk '/bash$/' /etc/passwd | grep root
D. awk -F: '/bash$/ {print $0}' /etc/passwd | grep root
Answer: B
Question: 157
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 46 of 64
Observe the script below:
echo " Enter your name : "
read name
echo " Hello $name , Good Morning. "
What does read do in this script? (Choose all that apply.)
A. It will store the input in the name variable.
B. It will accept only file name as the input.
C. It will make the script stop execution if numbers are given as input.
D. It will make the program pause till the input is given through the standard input.
Answer: A, D
Question: 158
View the Exhibit and examine the output of the following command:
rpm -qR ftp
What would you infer from the output?
A. It shows the list of files in the querying package.
B. It shows all the packages installed in the system.
C. It shows all the packages dependent on the querying package.
D. It shows all the packages on which the querying package depends.
Answer: D
Question: 159
You log in as normal user bob and execute the mount command without any arguments. What
would be the output of this command?
A. mount will prompt for the device to mount.
B. All the currently mounted file systems will be displayed.
C. All the file systems defined only in /etc/fstab will be displayed.
D. mount will report an error which says the mount command is not found.
Answer: B
Question: 160
Identify commands that can process text in a file. (Choose all that apply.)
A. tr
B. cut
C. awk
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 47 of 64
D. paste
E. strings
F. dos2unix
Answer: A, B, C, D
Question: 161
You have logged in to a newly installed Oracle Enterprise Linux machine in the graphical mode.
Which default desktop will be used after you log in?
A. Xfce
B. Xpde
C. KDE
D. TWM
E. IceWM
F. GNOME
Answer: F
Question: 162
View the script given below:
for i in $(seq 5)
do
echo $i
done
What is the output of this script?
A. 1
2345
B. 5
4321
C. 1 2 3 4 5
D. 5 4 3 2 1
Answer: A
Question: 163
The user smith on your system complained that he is not able to change his password. As an
administrator, you long-listed the passwd command and the /etc/shadow file on the system.
View the Exhibit that shows the output.
What would you do to enable smith to change his password?
A. Set SGID on /usr/bin/passwd.
B. Set SUID on /usr/bin/passwd.
C. Set sticky bit on /usr/bin/passwd.
D. Set write and execute permissions for others on /etc/shadow.
E. Set read, write, and execute permissions for others on /etc/shadow.
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 48 of 64
Answer: B
Question: 164
As user smith you issue the mesg command on the tty1 terminal to know its status. The output of
the command is shown below:
[ smith@station2 ]$ mesg
is y
[ smith@station2 ]$
Which three statements are true in this context? (Choose three.)
A. The talkd daemon honors the current mesg status.
B. The wall command honors the current mesg status.
C. The talk command honors the current mesg status.
D. The talkd daemon does not honor the current mesg status.
E. The talk command does not honor the current mesg status.
F. The wall command does not honor the current mesg status.
Answer: A, B, C
Question: 165
Match the following commands with their actions in the execute mode of the vi editor:
1) :e! a) save and exit
2) :X b) exit even if changes have not been saved
3) :wq c) save and exit even if the file is read only
4) :w! d) forget changes since last write
5) :q! e) save the file even if it is marked read only
6) :wq! f) encrypt the file along with a password
A. 1-d, 2-f, 3-c, 4-b, 5-e, 6-a
B. 1-f, 2-b, 3-a, 4-e, 5-d, 6-c
C. 1-c, 2-b, 3-a, 4-f, 5-d, 6-e
D. 1-d, 2-f, 3-a, 4-e, 5-b, 6-c
Answer: D
Question: 166
After logging in as root, you want to install a new kernel. How would you install the new kernel?
A. Install the new kernel by using rpm with the -i option.
B. Install the new kernel by using rpm with the --F option.
C. Install the new kernel by using rpm with the --force option.
D. Upgrade the existing kernel with the new kernel using the -U option with the rpm command.
Answer: A
Question: 167
You have to start a process in the bash shell and at the same time want to work in the shell. How
would you achieve this without terminating the process?
A. Press [Ctrl] + [y] while the process is running.
B. Press [Ctrl] + [d] while the process is running.
C. Press [Ctrl] + [z] while the process is running.
D. Press [Ctrl] + [c] while the process is running.
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 49 of 64
Answer: C
Question: 168
Match the following backslash-escaped characters with their description:
1. \c a. newline
2 . \v b. carriage return
3 . \r c. vertical tab
4 . \n d. suppressing trailing newline
A. 1-d, 2-c, 3-b, 4-a
B. 1-b, 2-d, 3-c, 4-a
C. 1-c, 2-b, 3-a, 4-d
D. 1-a, 2-b, 3-d, 4-c
Answer: A
Question: 169
Observe the code given below:
a=5.56
b=4.32
c=`echo $a + $b | bc`
echo "$a + $b = $c"
echo " Final Output is $c"
What would be the final output of this code?
A. 9
B. 9.8
C. 9.9
D. 9.88
Answer: D
Question: 170
Bob wants to send the contents of the /project/javaclass file to smith using mail through the
command line. Which command would help him achieve the task?
A. mail smith@example.com < /project/javaclass.
B. mail smith@example.com > /project/javaclass.
C. mail smith@example.com << /project/javaclass.
D. mail smith@example.com >> /project/javaclass.
Answer: A
Question: 171
An attempt by bob to remotely access smith's shell results in an error as follows:
[bob@server100 ~]$ ssh server200
The authenticity of host 'server200 (192.168.0.200)' can't be established.
RSA key fingerprint is 1c:6e:b7:8b:65:cc:04:e8:16:ca:7e:81:de:d6:5e:c4.
What would you infer from the error?
A. The hostname could not be mapped to an IP address.
B. The PubkeyAuthentication parameter is set to no in the /etc/ssh/ssd_config file.
C. The ssh verified that the system claiming to be server200 is server200 and not any other host.
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 50 of 64
D. This response is because ssh is unable to find server200 in the ~/.ssh/known_hosts file of
server100.
Answer: D
Question: 172
The user smith issued the egrep "^[[:alnum:]]{4,}$" file1.txt | wc –l command. What would be the
expected output from this command?
A. the total number of lines that have 4 or more characters
B. the total number of words that have 4 or more characters
C. the total number of lines that are shorter than 4 characters
D. the total number of words that are shorter than 4 characters
Answer: A
Question: 173
Which two statements about bzip2 are correct? (Choose two.)
A. It supports recovery from media errors.
B. It is portable, works in 32/64 bit platform.
C. It has lower compression ratio than gzip.
D. Its default action saves original file after creating new compressed file.
E. It first does all of the decompression in memory, and then sends out the contents of the
decompressed file to STDOUT.
Answer: A, B
Question: 174
The user smith on station1 is trying to use sftp to transfer some files to and from stationX, and
receives an error message as shown below:
[smith@station1 ~]$ sftp stationx
Connecting to stationX...
root@stationX's password:
request for subsystem 'sftp' failed on channel 0
couldn't read packet: Connection reset by peer
[smith@station1 ~]$
How would you resolve the issue?
A. Restart the xinetd service on stationX with the gssftp service enabled.
B. Restart the sshd service on stationX with the IgnoreRhosts parameter set to no in
/etc/ssh/sshd_config.
C. Restart the sshd service on stationX with /usr/bin/sftp enabled as the subsystem parameter in
/etc/ssh/sshd_config.
D. Restart the sshd service on stationX with /usr/libexec/openssh/sftp-server enabled as a
subsystem parameter in the /etc/ssh/sshd_config file.
Answer: D
Question: 175
You have logged in as user smith at tty1 terminal and issued the following incomplete command
at the bash prompt:
[root@station1 ~]# if [ i > j ] then
>
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 51 of 64
The shell displays the default secondary prompt ">". What would you do to make "=>" as the
default secondary prompt temporarily only for user smith and for the tty1 terminal current
session?
A. Redefine PS1=?>
B. Redefine PS2=?>
C. Redefine PS3=?>
D. Redefine PS4=?>
Answer: B
Question: 176
Exhibit:
You have given 1 as the input. What is the output if the script is executed using the default shell
interpreter?
A. 1
2
3
4
5
B. 1
2
3
4
C. 1 2 3 4
D. 1 2 3 4 5
Answer: A
Question: 177
Identify the option that has the correct match for an Enterprise Linux standard/feature with its
description:
1) POSIX a) helps software to predict the location of installed files and directories
2) FHS b) helps provide compatibility among distributions
3) LSB c) GNU project's replacement for the UNIX kernel to work in Linux
4) HURD d) assures code portability between systems
A. 1-b, 2-d, 3-a, 4-c
B. 1-d, 2-a, 3-b, 4-c
C. 1-c, 2-a, 3-d, 4-b
D. 1-b, 2-c, 3-d, 4-a
Answer: B
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 52 of 64
Question: 178
Match the process status with its definition.
1. Running a. Waiting for some event (for example, user input)
2. Stopped b. Child not properly reaped by parent
3. Sleeping c. Still loaded in memory, but not running
4. Zombie d. Currently being allocated CPU slices
A. 1-b, 2-c, 3-b, 4-a
B. 1-a, 2-b, 3-d, 4-c
C. 1-d, 2-c, 3-a, 4-b
D. 1-c, 2-b, 3-a, 4-d
Answer: C
Question: 179
Which two statements are true about the init process? (Choose two.)
A. Process ID (PID) of init is always 1.
B. Process ID (PID) of init is always 0.
C. The first process spawned by the kernel is init.
D. init uses the exec() method to spawn a new process.
E. By default, normal users can use init to change the run level.
Answer: A, C
Question: 180
Note the following command executed by the user smith on server1.
[smith@server1 ~]$ groups
apps smith sysgroup admins scott
[smith@server1 ~]$ touch file1 newfile
[smith@server1 ~]$ mkdir dir1 dir2
[smith@server1 ~]$ ls
dir1 dir2 file1 newfile
What would be the default group of the files and directories created by user smith on server1?
A. scott
B. apps
C. smith
D. admins
E. sysgroup
Answer: B
Question: 181
Which file compression standards are recognized and could be decompressed by gunzip?
(Choose all that apply.)
A. zip
B. gzip
C. bzip2
D. compress
Answer: A, B, D
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 53 of 64
Question: 182
Identify the true statements about sendmail. (Choose all that apply.)
A. Sendmail is a mail server.
B. Sendmail acts as an e-mail client.
C. Sendmail supports only IMAP protocol.
D. Sendmail can be used to send a file with the -t option at the command line.
Answer: A, D
Question: 183
A user issued the following command on a Linux system:
find / -name passwd | cpio -o | bzip2 > passwd.cpio.bz2
What could be the purpose of issuing this command?
A. to find all files called passwd in the root file system ( / )
B. to find the /etc/passwd file and compress it using bzip2
C. to create a compressed cpio archive of all files with the name passwd.
D. to create a compressed cpio archive of the list of all files with the name passwd
Answer: C
Question: 184
You want to secure the server1 server by denying root access through ssh. Which file would you
edit on server1 to achieve this task?
A. ~/.ssh/rc
B. ~/.ssh/config
C. /etc/ssh/sshrc
D. /etc/ssh/sshd_config
Answer: D
Question: 185
Match the query commands with their functions.
1. rpm -qa a. lists packages on which the package depends
2. rpm -qi b. lists all packages installed on the system
3. rpm -qR c. list of all the files in the package
4. rpm -ql d. information about the package
A. 1-d, 2-c, 3-d, 4a.
B. 1-d, 2-c, 3-b, 4-d.
C. 1-b, 2-d, 3-a, 4-c.
D. 1-b, 2-c, 3-d, 4-a.
Answer: C
Question: 186
As an administrator you want to make sure that accidentally you do not delete files using rm
command. You also want to make sure that even the use of rm command without any valid
switches prompts for confirmation before file deletion. Which option would help you achieve this
task?
A. alias rm="rm -i".
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 54 of 64
B. alias rm="rm -f".
C. alias rm="rm -r".
D. alias rm="rm -v".
Answer: A
Question: 187
Exhibit:
What does the case statement do in the script? (Choose two.)
A. exits the script if 0 is supplied as the input
B. executes like a series of if-then-else statements
C. prints all output of all commands on standard output
D. executes the last echo statement if 0 is supplied as the input
Answer: B, D
Question: 188
As user smith you have executed the following command at station1:
[smith@station1 ~]$ ssh root@server1 /etc/init.d/sendmail restart
Which statement is true about the execution of this command?
A. The command fails with an error command not found.
B. The command is executed by station1 without logging in to server1.
C. The command is executed by the server1 server without sending back the output to station1.
D. The command is executed by server1 after the correct password is entered by the user and
the output is sent back to station1.
Answer: D
Question: 189
Exhibit:
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 55 of 64
You have logged in as the user bob and now you want to send a message to smith and check if
he is logged on to the system by using the w command. You find smith logged in to two terminals,
so you send the message using the write command without specifying smith's terminal. To which
terminal is the message sent?
A. the terminal with the least idle time
B. the terminal with the maximum idle time
C. to smith's last login terminal irrespective of the idle time
D. to smith's first login terminal irrespective of the idle time
Answer: A
Question: 190
As a root user you want to modify the default shell prompt to include the hostname as part of the
prompt. Also you want the change in the hostname to reflect on the prompt immediately. Which
option would help you achieve this task?
A. PS2='[`hostname`]'
B. PS1='[`hostname`]'
C. PS2=''[`hostname`]''
D. PS1=''[`hostname`]''
Answer: B
Question: 191
Match the positional parameter with its functionality.
1. $0 a. lists the number of arguments passed
2. $# b. name of the shell script
3. $@ c. lists the arguments passed
A. 1-a, 2-c, 3-b.
B. 1-b, 2-a, 3-c.
C. 1-a. 2-b, 3-c.
D. 1-c, 2-b, 3-a.
Answer: B
Question: 192
Exhibit:
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 56 of 64
A /project directory is created on a Linux file system with 1776 permissions. Which statement is
true?
A. Only the root user has complete control over the /project directory.
B. The user smith can create files in /project but he will not be able to delete them.
C. The user scott can do anything in the /project directory including deleting all files, even those
created by the root user.
D. All members of the apps group can create, delete, and modify all files that belong to the apps
group in the /project directory.
Answer: C
Question: 193
As a root user you have issued the following commands at the bash prompt:
[root@station1 ~]#set a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z
[root@station1 ~]#shift 9
[root@station1 ~]#echo ${10}
What would be the output of the echo command?
A. It will print the letter j.
B. It will print the letter s.
C. It will print $1 followed by the literal 0.
D. It will print ${10} onto the standard output.
Answer: B
Question: 194
Which two commands would you use to kill all the processes owned by the user smith? (Choose
two.)
A. pkill -9 -u smith
B. skill -9 -u smith
C. pkill -1 -u smith
D. skill -1 -u smith
E. pkill -19 -u smith
Answer: A, B
Question: 195
Identify the true statements about the nice value. (Choose two.)
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 57 of 64
A. It only accepts priority values less than 19.
B. By default it reduces the priority of a process by 10.
C. A higher nice value makes a process run at a lower priority.
D. By default a normal user can make a process run at a higher priority.
Answer: B, C
Question: 196
You have downloaded a file called firefox.tar.gz. Which of the following commands could help you
to extract the files from this tar file? (Choose all that apply.)
A. tar xjf firefox.tar.gz
B. tar xzf firefox.tar.gz
C. tar -xvjf firefox.tar.gz
D. tar --gzip -xf firefox.tar.gz
Answer: B, D
Question: 197
As a user smith you executed the following command to change the default priority of the date
command:
[smith@station2 ~]$ nice --10 date
nice : cannot set priority : Permission denied
[smith@station2 ~]$
What could be the reason for the error message?
A. smith does not have the SUID bit set on nice.
B. smith does not have the execute permission on nice.
C. smith does not have the permission to change the nice value from the default to a lower value.
D. smith does not have the permission to change the nice value from the default to a higher
value.
Answer: C
Question: 198
You receive a file that has the extension .tar and you are unable to open it. How would you find
what type of file it is?
A. By issuing the md5 command
B. By issuing the file command
C. By issuing the strings command
D. By issuing -t switch with the tar command
Answer: B
Question: 199
Match the following Regular Expressions (RE) with their resultant actions:
1) ^RE a) anchor RE at end of line
2) RE$ b) anchor RE at start of word
3) \
4) RE\> d) anchor RE at start of line
A. 1-d, 2-a, 3-b, 4-c
B. 1-a, 2-d, 3-c, 4-b
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 58 of 64
C. 1-c, 2-b, 3-d, 4-a
D. 1-b, 2-c, 3-a, 4-d
Answer: A
Question: 200
You execute the following command:
find /home/ -name ?.jpg? -type f -user john
What is the expected output of this command?
A. A list of all regular files and directories with the pattern jpg in file names and owned by the user
john, under the /home directory
B. A list of all the regular files with the extension .jpg and owned by the user john, under the
/home directory and subdirectories
C. A list of all the regular files with the extension .jpg and owned by the user john, under the
/home directory, not in subdirectories
D. A list of all the regular files with the extension .jpg and owned by the users john and root,
under the /home directory and subdirectories
Answer: B
Question: 201
When bash is invoked as an interactive login shell, what is the order in which the bash
configuration files are read with the assumption that all the files exist and are readable?
A. ~/.bash_profile,~/.bash_login,/etc/profile,~/.profile
B. /etc/profile,~/.bash_profile,~/.bash_login,~/.profile
C. ~/.profile,~/.bash_login,/etc/profile,~/.bash_profile
D. ~/.bash_login,/etc/profile,~/.profile,~/.bash_profile
Answer: B
Question: 202
As per the Linux Documentation Project (LDP), which directory in the File System Hierarchy
(FSH) holds the online distribution documentation that includes FAQs, How-to's, Web sites, and
so on?
A. /usr/include
B. /usr/share/doc
C. /usr/local/share
D. /usr/share/man/doc
Answer: B
Question: 203
The GNU project was started by Free Software Foundation (FSF) with a goal to create a free
UNIX Clone. What do you understand by the term free as per the terms of FSF?
A. The source code will be provided free of cost with the software.
B. The software is fully free and is charged only to fix breakdowns.
C. The software is distributed free in runnable (installable) form with no cost.
D. The software is distributed free but does not offer the freedom to redistribute it.
Answer: A
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 59 of 64
Question: 204
You have logged in as a normal user bob and use write and wall to chat with other users.
How are you able to chat with other user terminals?
A. because the SGID bit is set on both the write and wall commands, and the group ownership is
set to root
B. because the SUID bit is set on both the write and wall commands, and the group ownership is
set to tty
C. because the SUID bit is set on both the write and wall commands, and the group ownership is
set to root
D. because the SGID bit is set on both the write and wall commands, and group ownership is set
to tty
Answer: D
Question: 205
You have set HISTCONTROL=ignoreboth. What are the implications of this setting on history?
A. It saves both duplicates and commands prefixed with a space.
B. It ignores commands prefixed with a space but saves duplicates.
C. It ignores duplicates but saves the commands prefixed with space.
D. It ignores both the duplicate commands and commands prefixed with a space.
Answer: D
Question: 206
Exhibit:
The user scott tries to long-list the contents of the /tmp/newdir directory and receives an error.
What could be the possible solution to let scott list the files in /tmp/newdir?
A. chmod 750 newdir
B. chmod 700 newdir
C. chmod u=rwx newdir
D. chmod 740 /tmp/newdir
Answer: A
Question: 207
Identify the XDMCP query type in which a client machine connects to the first available machine
to get a list of all machines to which it can connect.
A. Direct
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 60 of 64
B. Indirect
C. Parallel
D. Broadcast
Answer: B
Question: 208
Identify two correct statements about the cp command in association with the inode table.
(Choose two.)
A. Deletes the old directory entry with the old file name
B. Allocates a free inode number placing a new entry in the inode table
C. Has no impact on the inode table (except for time stamp or location of data on disk)
D. Creates a new directory entry that associates with a new name and inode number
Answer: B, D
Question: 209
Identify the correct statements about the tr command? (Choose all that apply.)
A. It works from STDOUT.
B. It helps in Regex pattern matching.
C. It can be used to delete a set of characters.
D. It can be used to merge multiple blank lines into one.
E. It can be used to translate one set of characters into another.
Answer: C, D, E
Question: 210
A group of users on a Linux system have a common working directory /documents with 1770
permissions. You have a scenario where you have to let all users of the group delete any file or
directory in /documents. What would you do in this situation to let them delete any file or directory
in /documents?
A. Remove sticky bit on the directory.
B. Set 3770 permissions on /documents
C. Set rwx permissions for others on /documents.
D. Set 777 permissions on all files and directories in /documents.
Answer: A
Question: 211
As the user smith you issue the following command:
[smith@station1 ~]$ scp file1 bob@station1:~bob
Enter passphrase for key '/home/smith/.ssh/id_dsa': file1 100% 0 0.0KB/s 00:00
[smith@station1 ~]$
What is the authentication method used in the node?
A. Password authentication
B. Public Key Authentication
C. Host-based authentication
D. KeyBoard-Interactive Authentication
E. Challenge Response Authentication
Answer: B
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 61 of 64
Question: 212
Identify the true statement about AutoFS.
A. AutoFS mounting can be triggered only by a root user.
B. Both on demand mounting and unmounting of file systems is taken care of by AutoFS.
C. AutoFS automatically mounts the file systems on demand but requires manual unmounting.
D. AutoFS requires manual mounting of file systems but unmounts them without user
intervention.
Answer: B
Question: 213
Which two statements are true about lp? (Choose two.)
A. It submits files for printing.
B. It cannot alter a pending job.
C. By default it sets a priority of 100 to any print job.
D. It uses "localhost" or the value of the CUPS_SERVER environment variable as the default
hostname.
Answer: A, D
Question: 214
As the root user on station1, you are trying to administer a printer, configured on the server1
server using CUPS, through a browser. Which two statements holds true in this context. (Choose
two.)
A. CUPS uses port 630.
B. Public access provides only read access.
C. By default, CUPS accepts connections only from localhost.
D. Administering CUPS from a remote system does not require any authentication.
Answer: B, C
Question: 215
Which command could user smith use to change the time stamps of the file1 and dir1 given
below, to the current system time?
[smith@server1 ~]$ ls -l
-rw-rw-r-- 1 smith smith 6 Jan 20 10:01 file1
drwxrwxr-x 2 smith smith 4096 Jan 20 10:54 dir1
A. cat
B. stat
C. time
D. file
E. touch
Answer: E
Question: 216
Match the following symbolic notations of file permissions with their numeric values.
1) - - - s - - - - - - a) 5000
2) - - - - - - s - - - b) 4100
3) - - - - - - - - - t c) 7101
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 62 of 64
4) - - - S - - - - - T d) 1001
5) - - - s - - S - - t e) 7040
6) s - -S r - S - -T f) 2010
A. 1-d, 2-f, 3-b, 4-e, 5-c, 6-a
B. 1-b, 2-f, 3-d, 4-a, 5-c, 6-e
C. 1-f, 2-a, 3-c, 4-b, 5-e, 6-d
D. 1-b, 2-d, 3-f, 4-a, 5-e, 6-c
Answer: B
Question: 217
As normal user scott you have generated version 2 dsa key pair using the ssh-keygen program.
What are the default user permissions available for the private key?
A. Only read
B. Both read and write
C. Both read and execute
D. Both write and execute
E. All read, write, and execute
Answer: A
Question: 218
You execute the command given below:
find / -perm +7000 -ls
What is the expected output from this command? (Choose all that apply.)
A. List (ls) all files and directories on the system with full permissions set.
B. List (ls) all files and directories on the system with all special permissions set.
C. List (ls) all files and directories on the system with any of the special permissions set.
D. Long-list (ls -l) all files and directories on the system with all the special permissions set.
E. Long-list (ls -l) all files and directories on the system with any of the special permissions set.
Answer: C, E
Question: 219
Exhibit:
Which command would change the root user's current working directory to /usr/local?
A. cd -
B. cd ../..
C. cd usr/local
D. cd ~/usr/local
Answer: A
Question: 220
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 63 of 64
As a root user, you have configured a file system using AutoFS with the default settings. You
changed to one of the directories under AutoFS control at the tty1 terminal and started working at
the tty2 terminal. What is the status of the file system mounted in the tty1 terminal after the idle
time as mentioned in the /etc/auto.master file?
A. The file system remains mounted until you logout from tty1 terminal.
B. The file system remains mounted as long as the system is up and running.
C. The file system is unmounted the moment you start working at the tty2 terminal.
D. The file system gets unmounted automatically after left idle for 5 minutes irrespective of the
AutoFS configuration file time settings.
Answer: A
Question: 221
Exhibit:
/tmp/backups is a directory with SUID and SGID set as shown in the Exhibit. The user smith is
trying to access this directory. Which three statements are true? (Choose three.)
A. The user smith can only navigate to the /tmp/backups directory using the others permissions
on the directory.
B. The user smith cannot even list the files in the /tmp/backups directory because SUID is meant
for executables only.
C. The user smith has full permissions on the /tmp/backups directory because SUID enables him
to work with the security context of the root user.
D. The user smith has full permissions on the /tmp/backups directory because SGID enables him
to work with the security context of the root group.
E. The user smith cannot even list the files in the /tmp/backups directory because not only SGID,
but also the group membership an permissions for the group are required on the directory.
Answer: A, B, E
Question: 222
You have logged in as normal user bob with the default login shell. An attempt by bob to change
the default shell to /bin/sh fails with an error. What could be the possible reason?
A. The SUID bit is not set on chsh by default.
B. The /bin/sh entry is not listed in /etc/shells file.
C. bob does not have the permissions to change the shell by default.
D. bob does not have read permissions on the/etc/shells file by default.
Answer: B
Question: 223
The root user tries to create the hard link link1 to /root/textfile in /boot and receives the error:
[root@server1 ~]# ln textfile /boot/link1
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 64 of 64
ln: creating hardlink `/boot/link' to `textfile': Invalid cross-device link
Which two statements are true? (Choose two.)
A. Hard links cannot span file systems.
B. /boot file system does not exist or it is not mounted.
C. /boot can occupy files that are required at boot time only.
D. Hard links cannot be created to the nonexistent file /root/textfile.
E. Hard link is supposed to be another physical presence of a file on the same file system.
Answer: A, E
Question: 224
The user smith wants to navigate to the /usr/share/doc directory. His current working directory is
/home/smith. Which of these commands would help smith to navigate to the /usr/share/doc
directory? (Choose all that apply.)
A. cd /usr/share/doc
B. cd ../usr/share/doc
C. cd / ; usr/share/doc
D. cd ../../usr/share/doc
E. cd / ; cd usr/share/doc
Answer: A, D, E
End of Document
Oracle EXAM 1Z0-532 Oracle Hyperion Financial Management 11 Essentials
Total Questions: 64
Question: 1
What are the three characteristics of sub EnumMemberLists ()? A. Specifies which dimensions have member lists B. Names each member list in eachdimension C. Specifies the valid members for a member list D. Specifies the number of lists for each dimension E. Is used to create both static and dynamic lists
Answer: B,C,D
Question: 2
Identify the dimensions that are built by using the applicationprofile? A. Year and period only B. Value and view only C. View, Period, and Year D. Period, Value, and Year E. Scenario, Period, and Year
Answer: C
Question: 3
To which dimension do custom dimensions provide additional detail? A. Accounts B. Entity C. Value D. ICP E. Custom dimensions are independent of other dimensions.
Answer: E
Question: 4
The Account dimension's Is ICP"R" property specifies________. A. If ICP transactions,including self-ICP transactions, are enabled for the account B. If ICP transactions are not enabled for the account C. if ICP transactions can be drilled back to source activity D. if ICP transactions are enabled for the account, but the account cannot have ICP transactions with itself
Answer: C
Question: 5
EPMA provides a Shared Dimension Library for maintaining EPM dimensions. Identify two reasons that would make you consider using EPMA to maintain dimensions over FM Classic metadata files? A. You can use the same metadata file format from FM Classic to import dimensions In EPMA. B. Dimensions can be shared across applications or can be local to a specific application. C. In EPMA, you can make a change to a member in a shared dimension once and sync ft across FM and Planning applications. D. You can assign member access security in the EPMA dimension library for a shared dimension and sync it across FM and Planning applications.
Answer: C,D
Question: 6
Which is the rule function used to notify the following year that a consolidation is needed due to recalculation of the current year? A. Exp B. ImpactStatus C. OpenDataUnit D. A rule function is not used; input subroutine is used.
Answer: A
Question: 7
Identify three valid application settings A. MaxNumDocAttachments B. UseSecurityForEntities C. UseSecurityForValue D. Va1idationAccount E. SupportSubmissionPhaseforEntity
Answer: B,C,D
Question: 8
Identify the purpose of using task lists. A. To upload user “to do”items to FM with due dates and alert dates B. To organize and group related tasks into a navigational aid for users C. To create lists of members with VB script D. To list tasks to be executed by the FM Server E. To define the review path for consolidation review
Answer: B
Question: 9
What are two effects of deploying an EPMA application? A. The EPMA metadata is extracted to a text file. B. If enabled, it pushes the data to Essbase via Essbase Analytic Link for FM. C. The EPMA application metadata is used to create an FM application on the FM server. D. The application is sent out to a star schema for use by Essbase and other products. E. When you redeploy an application, the application metadata is merged or replaced based on the changes made since the last deployment.
Answer: C,E
Question: 10
You need to migrate an FM application in version 11 from development to production. Your environment has two instances of Shared Services, one for development and one for production. Identify the two true statements about using Life Cycle Management to perform the application migration from development to production within this environment. A. You can select specific objects to migrate or all objects to migrate. B. Migrating applications from development to production in disconnected environments, where thereare two instances of Shared Services, is not supported. C. Life Cycle Management will migrate both objects and data. D. Life Cycle Management will generate an XML file that can be modified and used for importing totarget applications. E. The only role necessary to perform LCM activities is ApplicationAdministrator.
Answer: C,D
Question: 11
Identify the three true statements about I/C activity. A. Intercompany transactions are eliminated at the first common parent. B. Intercompany transactions can be processed for both open and closed periods. C. Matching tolerances can be set by percent, dollar amount, orboth. D. Eliminations are processed during both Calculation and Consolidation processes. E. I/C reports are available to display transactions by status-Matched, Mismatched, or Unmatched.
Answer: B,D,E
Question: 12
For metadata loads, you can import changes to metadata for which three application elements? A. Periods B. Accounts C. Entities D. Currencies E. Value
Answer: A,B,E
Question: 13
Identify the three true statements about security classes. A. Security classes are grouping mechanisms for assigning security access to sets of related members, documents, or other objects. B. Access levels for security classes include metadata, read, promote, and none. C. Security classes are assigned to FDM locations in addition to FM objects. D. Security classes cannot be created in EPMA by creating a Security Class dimension and associating it. E. Security classes are created in Classic FM under Load Tasks.
Answer: A,B,E
Question: 14
Fora classic application,what are the two valid methods to extract metadata to a text file? A. You can extract metadata usingthe EPMA file generator. B. Metadata can be extracted from within FM under extract tasks. C. Metadata can be extracted from within EPMA Dimension Library. D. Metadata can be extracted from the File > Export menu. E. Metadata can be extracted from an FDM application.
Answer: D,E
Question: 15
What is the primary purpose of Extended Analytics in FM? A. Exports Financial Management metadata and data to an Essbase database B. Exports Financial Management metadata and data to a relational database C. Exports Financial Management metadata and data to an Excel pivot table D. Provides analytic capabilities directly against the Financial Management application
Answer: C
Question: 16
The Audit Intersection link in Data Grid menus takes the user to: A. The Data Audit listing for the cell B. The FDM location used to load the data C. The database log for the data storage table D. The Task Audit page E. Line item details
Answer: D
Question: 17
How can an administrator get a list of security classes AND assigned users defined in the FM application? A. Select Document > Reporting > Security > Security report. r B) Select Tasks > Extract Tasks > Extract Security. B. Select Tasks > Extract Tasks > Extract Metadata. C. In the EPMA Dimension Library, under the Security Class dimension for the application, rightclick the application and select Assign Access Control, then select Security reports, and choose Classes by user. D. In Shared Services, right-click the application and select Assign Access control, then select Security reports, and choose Classes by user.
Answer: A
Question: 18
The organization by period feature is used for what two purposes? A. Segregating rules by month and year B. Controlling when entities consolidate into specific parents C. Organizing the period dimension into multiple hierarchies D. Managing the ownership percentage of one entity by others E. Maintaining stored data values for changes in the Entity structure over time
Answer: A,D
Question: 19
If Sample Company 1230LAP has an intercompany balance with sample company PQR, when is the balance eliminated, assuming that consolidation rules have not been enabled in Application Settings? A. All eliminations occur within the uppermost member on each of the entity dimension hierarchies. B. Eliminations occur in the [Elimination] value members of the children of the first common parent entity. C. Eliminations occur in the [Elimination] value members of the children of the first common parent account. D. If the consolidation rule in Application Settings is not enabled, the intercompany accounts do not eliminate.
Answer: C
Question: 20
How many custom dimensions do Financial Management applications allow? A. 2 B. 3 C. 4 D. 5 E. None. Financial Management supports only fixed dimensions.
Answer: E
Question: 21
You need to copy an FM Classic application including data from the production environment to the test environment to test new business rules. How can you do this? A. Use the FMCopyApplication.exe utility. B. Copy the application using the Admin Tasklist, select Extract Application and then import into a new application. C. Select the Copy User Provisioning in Shared Services. D. Use Life Cycle Management to migrate the artifacts and data. E. Use the EPMA File Generator Utility to extract and import metadata.
Answer: B
Question: 22
The Value dimension stores detail from child to parent for which dimension? A. View B. Entity C. Account D. Currency E. Scenario
Answer: A
Question: 23
Custom dimensions may be used to perform A. Cash Flows B. Roll forwards C. Historical Overrides D. B and C E. A, B, and C
Answer: D
Question: 24
Identify the two features that are available for data forms but not data grids. A. View and update data B. View calculation and consolidation status C. Change point of view selections D. Drill in and out on row and column members E. Export to Excel F. Open in Smart View
Answer: E
Question: 25
Identify the two true statements about property value inheritance for dimension members in EPMA. A. Property values are always inherited from ancestors and cannot be changed. B. Property values are inherited from the closest ancestor except when a property value has beenspecifically entered. C. You must manually enter and store property values for all the dimension members. D. Property value inheritance decreases maintenance requirements for dimensions. E. Inheritance takes precedence over properties defined in metadata load files.
Answer: B,D
Question: 26
Into which Value dimension member can a journal be entered? A. [Parent Adjs] B. C. [Entity Adjs] D. E. [USD]
Answer: B
Question: 27
When designing for Planning and Financial Management, what are the design considerations for dimensions and member? A. In FM, spaces are allowed in member names while in Planning, spaces are not allowed in member names. B. In FM, spaces are not allowed in member names while in Planning, spaces are allowed in member names. C. In FM, descriptions are not required to be unique while in Planning, aliases must be unique. D. A and C E. B and C
Answer: D
Question: 28
In Task Automation, a link in a task flow: A. Passes the point of view to a stage B. Connects the task to a specific user C. Passes control from one stage to another D. Passes control from a task to the IT department E. Passes a process unit from one review level to the next review level
Answer: D
Question: 29
Life Cycle Management moves artifacts in which two ways? A. From one application to another application, moving Security, Dimensions, Phased Submissions, Rules, Documents, Forms, and Member Lists B. From Hyperion Enterprise into FM C. It does not move artifacts; it just verifies that artifacts are valid. D. From FM into various document management suites E. From one application to a file system, moving Security, Dimensions, Phased Submissions, RulesDocuments, Forms, and Member Lists
Answer: A,D
Question: 30
In addition to Sub translate routine, which two application settings are also used for translate? A. DefaultRateForICPAccounts B. DefaultRateForBalanceAccounts C. DefaultRateForExpenseAccounts D. DefaultRateForFlowAccounts
Answer: B,C
Question: 31
Identify the three true statements about the Financial Management architecture. A. Hyperion Financial Management uses a multitier architecture that includes a client tier,application tier, and a data tier. B. The client tier (user interface) communicates with the data tier. C. The client tier (user interface) communicates with the application tier. D. The application tier contains the application as well as the report and Web servers. E. The datatier contains the Essbase database for all Hyperion Financial Management applicationdata and source data.
Answer: A,C,E
Question: 32
What feature in Financial Reporting allows you to "drill into" a dimension? A. You cannot drill into dimensions in FR. B. Expansions C. Drill Options D. Zoom Options E. Enable for Smart Slice
Answer: A
Question: 33
What four actions can an administrator perform from the FM Administration menu? A. Manage documents. B. View system messages. C. Run Data and Task Audits. D. Manage Task Flows. E. Manage Security.
Answer: A,B,D,E
Question: 34
Identify the four processes through which Financial Management supports a virtual close. A. A fullyautomated consolidation tool that combines financial data across many ledgers andconsolidates to a corporate or business unit level B. Automatic posting of eliminating entries, accrual entries, and allocations C. Automated collection, mapping, verification, and movement of data D. Automated intercompany processing E. Analysis capabilities throughout close over the Web and in Excel
Answer: A,C,D,E
Question: 35
Identify the three true statements about accounts and account types. A. Financial Management provides predefined account types such as Asset, Revenue, Flow, Balance,and Dynamic. B. Account types tell FM how the child account should aggregate to the parent. C. Account types tell FM how the account balances should accumulate over time. D. Base level accounts do not automatically roll up to parents; business rules are required. E. Children cannot inherit the account type of their parent unless specifically defined by the administrator.
Answer: A,B,E
Question: 36
You are designing the dimensionality for your Financial Management application. Identify the two true statements about dimensionality in FM. A. Scenario dimension contains members such asCYActual,CYBudget, and PYActual. B. Value dimension contains Periodic, year-to-date, quarter-to-date, and any custom members added by the administrator. C. Value dimension contains Entity Currency, Entity Curr Adj, Entity Curr Total, ParentCurrency, and any currency members added by the administrator. D. The preferred method to add detail to accounts is to build subaccounts into the Accounts dimension. E. The Intercompany Partner dimension is managed by FM based on settings in the Entity dimension.
Answer: A,B
Question: 37
A Classic FM application profile contains which three components? A. Frequency B. Calendar C. Dimension Associations D. Language(s) E. Scenario
Answer: B,C,E
Question: 38
Identify the three true statements about Financial Reporting. A. Financial Reporting provides highly formatted, printable reports for FM applications. B. Financial Reporting provides ad hoc reporting capabilities for FM applications. C. Financial Reporting document types include reports, books, snapshots, and snapshot books. D. You can create a single P&L report and run that report for any member in the Entity dimension
Answer: A,C,D
Question: 39
Before you can define an alias for a dimension or member in EPMA, you must A. Do nothing; the Alias property is created by default B. Create an Alias dimension and associate it C. Create an Alias attribute D. Create an Alias Property E. Create an Alias Table
Answer: E
Question: 40
In which four ways can a user access FR reports? A. In the Workspace in HTML mode B. In the Workspace in PDF mode C. Over the Web outside of the Workspace in HTML mode D. In Smart View using the BI+ Connection E. In PDF format from an email
Answer: A,B,C,E
Question: 41
Identify the correct sequence for building a Classic FM application: 1-Create the application shell. 2-Create an application profile. 3-Define metadata such as dimensions and application settings. 4-Load data, data forms, member lists, rules, and journals. 5-Define security. A. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 B. 2, 1, 4, 3, 5 C. 2, 1, 5, 3, 4 D. 1, 2, 5, 3, 4 E. 1, 2, 3, 5, 4
Answer: C
Question: 42
Identify two true statements about the native data load file format. A. The default column order for the native data file is Scenario, Year, Period, View, Entity, Value, Account, ICP, Custom1, Custom2, Custom3, and Custom4. B. You cannot change the column order for the data file. C. The Group section defines the POV for the data file; you can define only a single member for each POV dimension. D. The Line Items detail section contains data values. E. The Group section is required.
Answer: A,C
Question: 43
Identify the two true statements about rule types in FM. A. The Dynamic rule type allows you to calculate both parent and base accounts. B. The NoInput rule type prevents users from entering data into specific cells or slices of cells usingHs.Nolnput. C. Calculate, Dynamic, Allocation, Input, No Input, Translate, Consolidate, Transactions, and Equitypickup are all valid rule types. D. If you need to calculate Gross Margin %, use the Translate rule type. E. Calculation rules are run only with FM specific calculation commands in Financial Management; no general VB commands.
Answer: A,B,D
Question: 44
Given the following syntax in a business rule: A. Calculate () B. strview C. Hs.Exp D. DIFFERENCE E. strPOV
Answer: A
Question: 45
Identify the three true statements about Dimension Associations in EPMA. A. Dimension associations are used when a property in one dimension is associated with the members in another dimension. B. The SecurityClass dimension is associated with the SecurityClass property only in an Account andEntity. C. The Alias dimension is associated with the Alias property for Account, Entity, and Scenario dimensions. D. The Currency dimension is associated with the Currency property of the Account dimension. E. A PlugAccount from the Account dimension can be associated with the Account dimension.
Answer: A,B,D
Question: 46
Identify the three true statements. The EPMA import files for metadata_______. A. Contains sections for Dimensions, Dimension Associations, Hierarchies, and Members B. Requires the Dimensions, Dimension Associations, Hierarchies, and Members section to create adimension C. Expects the Hierarchies section to be in Parent/Child format D. Requires that all members must be declared in the Members section before they can be added to the HIERARCHIES section E. Has it that the header, file_format = ads version =1.0, is optional for the import file
Answer: A,D,E
Question: 47
How many members Lists can you load at one time? A. 1 B. 2 C. 4 D. 10
Answer: A
Question: 48
Identify the three true statements about ERP Integrator (ERPI). A. ERPI supports PeopleSoft, Oracle E-Business Suite and SAP. B. ERPI integrates metadata and data from ERP source system into an Oracle Hyperion EPM targetapplication. C. ERPI provides drill through from Financial Management data forms, Smart View, and FinancialReporting. D. ERPI provides drill through to BI Dashboards. E. ERPI under the covers is Oracle Data Integrator.
Answer: A,B,D
Question: 49
How does the FM administrator manage the Intercompany Partner dimension? A. By selecting and deselecting the IsICP field on the entity member properties B. By selecting and deselecting the IsICP field on the account member properties C. It cannot be maintained by the administrator. FM automatically creates the ICP dimension to match all members in the Entity dimension. D. It cannot be maintained by the administrator. FM automatically creates the ICP dimension to match all members in the Account dimension. E. Using the Dimension editor in the same way as a custom dimension or Entity dimension
Answer: A
Question: 50
What are the two required steps for creating data synchronization? A. Map dimensions. B. Assign default members. C. Define mappings for all members D. Create the synchronization. E. Filter dimensions
Answer: B,C
Question: 51
Which utility imports users, groups, and roles into Shared Services? A. ImportSecurity.cmd B. ExportSecurity.cmd C. ProvisionUsers.cmd D. UpdateUsers.cmd E. CSSImport.cmd
Answer: D
Question: 52
You are designing the custom dimensions for your FM application. Identify the true statement. A. A dimension, once used for a specific purpose, can be used only for that purpose. B. All hierarchies within a custom dimension are automatically available to all the accounts. C. You specify the custom dimension members valid foran account by using the Custom1Top Member, Custom2 Top Member, Custom3 Top Member, and Custom4 Top Member. D. Hierarchies on custom dimensions must be symmetrical, with the same number of children under every parent. E. Different hierarchies within a custom dimension cannot be assigned to different accounts.
Answer: C
Question: 53
A custom function in rules is useful for: A. Organizing rules into subsets of code B. Controlling the ending of an If/Then C. Writing code that will be repeated in multiple places D. Defining conjunctions to be used along with variables E. Custom functions are not possible in FM,
Answer: B
Question: 54
The file format load journals to FM can include which four sections? A. File Format B. Scenario C. Journal Group D. Standard
Answer: A,B,C,D
Question: 55
Assuming you are using HFM Version 11.1.1.3, identify the three true statements about Calculation Manager. A. FMRulesMigrator.exe will migrate VB scripts into business rules in Calculation Manager. B. There is no utility to migrate VB script rules to Calculation Manager. C. In Calculation Manager, you can toggle back and forth between the graphical and script mode. D. In Calculation Manager, you can create one script that can execute against both a FinancialManagement application and Planning application. E. To use a business rule, you must validate and deploy the business rule.
Answer: A,C,D
Question: 56
Which clearing data using the Database Management module, dimension is not included for selection? A. Scenario B. Account C. Custom1 D. Entity E. Value
Answer: D
Question: 57
In a scenario with the zero view set to year-to-date, if January is $30 year to date and March is $90 year to date, what value does FM calculate for February year to date if no data is loaded? A. 0 B. 30 C. 45 D. 60 E. -30
Answer: D
Question: 58
Assuming you are using version 11.1.1.3, right-click menus are available in A. Data grids only B. Data forms only C. Task lists only D. Data grids and Data forms E. Data grids, Data forms, and Task lists
Answer: E
Question: 59
You need to track and report an additional level of detail for journal entries, tracking whether the adjustment came from the GL, legal, or other source. Identify the best method to meet this requirement. A. It is not possible to track additional levels of detail in journals. B. Build a custom dimension to capture the additional level of detail. C. Build subaccounts in the Accounts dimension to capture the additional level of detail. D. Use commentary to note the sources of journals. E. Use line item details.
Answer: A
Question: 60
Given the following syntax in a business rule: A. Calculate () B. strview C. Hs.Exp D. DIFFERENCE E. Hs.Scenario.DEFAULTVIEW (“”)
Answer: D
Question: 61
Your source data file has values for 12 months across the columns. What is the best way to load this file into FM with native load functionality? A. Split the file into 12 different files, each with a single month. Set the POV for the Period dimension = specific month. B. Define a range for periods in the POV with the following syntax: !Period = January..December. C. Make sure the column header has the month label; FM will load the column to the correct month. D. List the months in the POV with the following syntax:! Period= January-December. E. List the months in the POV with the following syntax:!Period = January, December.
Answer: B
Question: 62
Identify the four levels of security in Financial Management A. User Authentication B) Document B. Task C. Cell Level D. Data
Answer: A,B,C,D
Question: 63
What four steps are required to configure an FDM application with an FM application? A. Dimension names between FDM and FM are set in the FDM workbench or the Web client under metadata/dimensions. B. Define the FM application name in Integration Settings in FDM. C. Define the FM server name in machine profiles' properties. D. Map locations to an entity using the FDM workbench under Integration Settings. E. Define the FDM Web server name under IntegrationSettings in the FDM workbench.
Answer: A,C,D,E
Question: 64
You are loading data to FM under Load Tasks> Load Data. What are four valid options for how data should be loaded into the application? A. Merge B. Clear and Load C. Replace D. Replace by Security E. Accumulate within File F. Append
Answer: A,B,D,F
http://www.free-online-exams.com/Pages/Exams/ExamsList.aspx?code=69&Exam=Oracle
Exam : 1z0-023 - Oracle Architecture and Admin
http://www.free-online-exams.com/Pages/Exams/DumpsQA.aspx?d=1&c=1z0-023&q=1
Exam : 1z0-530 - Oracle 11g Enterprise Manager
http://www.free-online-exams.com/Pages/Exams/DumpsQA.aspx?d=Oracle&c=1z0-530&q=1
Exam : 1z0-054 - Oracle 11g Perf Tuning
http://www.free-online-exams.com/Pages/Exams/DumpsQA.aspx?d=1&c=1z0-054&q=1
Visit the Below Website to access the full version of exam questions for all IT vendors
http://www.free-online-exams.com
QUESTION NO: 55
How does compression affect resource utilization?
A. Reduces the amount of CPU and disk utilization
B. Increases the amount of CPU and disk utilization
C. Reduces the amount of disk but increases CPU utilization for loading
D. Increases the amount of disk but reduces CPU utilization for loading!
Answer: C
Explanation: http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/tividd/td/ITSMFD/SC32-9065-00/en_US/HTML/ab5w0007.htm
QUESTION NO: 56
Your customer wants to use Database Resource Manager to help ensure consistent performance based on users and operations. In designing this implementation, which limitation CANNOT be imposed through Database Resource Manager?
A. Specifying the maximum number of concurrent operations for a resource group
B. Limiting resource consumption for a resource group
C. Specifying the amount of parallelism for a resource group
D. Limiting access to particular data for a resource group
Answer: A
QUESTION NO: 57
How many Exadata Storage Server cells are there in a Full Rack Exadata database machine configuration that has 8 Database Server nodes?
A. 2
B. 14
C. 16
D. 24
Answer: B
QUESTION NO: 58
Identify the true statement about adaptive parallelism.
A. It Is turned on by default.
B. It is turned off by default.
C. You should always leave the default setting
D. There is no such thing.
Answer: B
Explanation: http://kerryosborne.oracle-guy.com/category/oracle/exadata/page/3/
QUESTION NO: 59
Identify the statement about Oracle OLAP that is NOT true.
A. Oracle OLAP cubes are stored in the Oracle relational database
B. Oracle OLAP uses standard Oracle database security.
C. Meta data for Oracle OLAP is accessible in an external data dictionary
D. Oracle OU\P can be deployed using RAC.
Answer: A
Explanation: http://download.oracle.com/docs/cd/B28359_01/olap.111/b28124/whatsnew.htm
According to the answer; "Oracle OLAP uses standard Oracle database security." is a false statement and "Meta data for Oracle OLAP is accessible in an external data dictionary" is a correct statement. But in Oracle documentation, http://download.oracle.com/docs/cd/E11882_01/olap.112/e17123/overview.htm#i1 011393; is says "With Oracle OLAP, standard Oracle Database security features are used to secure your multidimensional data.".
QUESTION NO: 60
Identity the true statement about a data warehouse
A. The data warehouse is typically refreshed as often as a transactional system,
B. Data warehouse queries are simpler than OLTP queries.
C. A data warehouse typically contains historical data.
D. Queries against a data warehouse never need summarized information.
Answer: C
Explanation: http://wiki.oracle.com/page/Oracle+OLAP+Terminology-D
QUESTION NO: 61
Identify the statement about ASM that is NOT true.
A. ASM is easier to manage than file systems.
B. ASM delivers the performance of raw partitions.
C. ASM is an extra cost option for Oracle databases.
D. ASM delivers automatic striping and mirroring.
Answer: B
Explanation:http://download.oracle.com/docs/cd/B28359_01/server.111/b31107/asmprepare.htm
QUESTION NO: 62
Which two statements are true about the advantages of using a
data warehouse?
A. A data warehouse uses fewer database structures, so access to answers is faster and easier
B. A data warehouse is typically implemented with a different design, making access faster.
C. A data warehouse is optimized for ongoing write activity, making response faster.
D. A data warehouse uses specialized features of the Oracle database, like materialized views and star transformations, making response faster.
Answer: A,D
QUESTION NO: 63
What are two ways in which query performance can be improved with partitioning?
A. Partition pruning
B. Partition optimization
C. Partition compression
D. Partition-wise joins
Answer: A,D
QUESTION NO: 64
Your customer is looking to implement ad-hoc analysis in a data warehouse. Which approach is least likely to be used assuming that the customer does not want the expense of managing view?
A. Star schema
B. Snowflake schema
C. Third normal form schema
D. OLAP
Answer: A
QUESTION NO: 65
You have analyzed your client's workload and the Materialized Views Advisor in Enterprise Manager recommends that you create some materialized views to improve performance. What should you do in order to most simply implement this change?
A. Rewrite all the queries in the application to identify materialized view
B. Rewrite existing queries. New queries will automatically use the views.
C. Respond positively to the Advisor to create the materialized views.
D. Build virtual views on a third normal form schema.
Answer: C
QUESTION NO: 66
A Full Rack Oracle Exadata Database Machine can contain 100 TB of disk space with high performance. How much user data should you conservatively estimate this configuration can hold?
A. 100 TB
B. 75 TB
C. 50 TB
D. 28 TB
E. 20 TB
Answer: A
QUESTION NO: 67
What would you do to compress data in partitions that are frequently updated in Oracle Database 11g?
A. Use Hybrid Columnar Compression.
B. Use Advanced Compression Option.
C. Use Hybrid Partitions.
D. Avoid compressing any data.
Answer: A
Explanation:http://blogs.oracle.com/datawarehousing/2010/01/new_whitepaper_on_exadata_hybr.html
QUESTION NO: 68
The Analytic Workspace Manager would be used to generate_______.
A. Materialized views
B. Oracle OLAP Option cubes
C. Oracle Data Mining algorithms
D. Oracle SQL Analytic functions
Answer: B
Explanation: http://forums.oracle.com/forums/thread.jspa?threadID=616811
QUESTION NO: 69
Which feature of Oracle Warehouse Builder can be used to help ensure data quality?
A. Data extraction
B. Data profiling
C. Logical mapping
D. Exception reporting
Answer: A
QUESTION NO: 70
Flash in the Oracle Exadata Database Machine is of lower latency (and enables faster access to data) than: A. Memory
B. Memory and locally attached disk
C. Memory and network-attached disk
D. Locally attached and network-attached disk
Answer: B
Oracle 1z0-515 Data Warehousing 11g Essentials 2/2
Visit the Below Website to access the full version of exam questions for all IT vendors
http://www.free-online-exams.com/
Oracle 1z0-515 Data Warehousing 11g Essentials 2/2
Visit the Below Website to access the full version of exam questions for all IT vendors
http://www.free-online-exams.com
QUESTION NO: 1
Indentify the true statement about REF partitions.
A. REF partitions have no impact on partition-wise joins.
B. Changes to partitioning in the parent table are automatically reflected in the child table.
C. Changes in the data in a parent table are reflected in a child table.
D. REF partitions can save storage space in the parent table.
Answer: B
Explanation: http://rajeshwaranbtech.blogspot.com/2010/06/ora-14652-in-reference-partitioningin. html
QUESTION NO: 2
Identify the control structure that would NOT be defined as part of a data flow with Oracle Data Integrator.
A. Loops
B. Conditions
C. Error handling
D. GOTOs
Answer: D
Explanation: http://www.oracle.com/global/hu/events/20080917/1_odi_odd_%20introduction_and_architecture.pdf
QUESTION NO: 3
For which type of query is the SQL result cache automatically disabled?
A. Queries that access data which changes frequently
B. Queries that return large amounts of data
C. Queries that use SQL functions such as SYSDATE
D. Queries that are used infrequently
Answer: C
Explanation: http://books.google.com/books?id=-4S6xQurmYC&pg=PA821&lpg=PA821&dq=SQL+result+cache+automatically+disabled&source=bl&ots=cmCLbFNfO-&sig=0EPaIT1ws3PkpqVhs-DSfalAnrQ&hl=en&ei=o8YTZtD0_fiBs6GzKUK&sa=X&oi=book_result&ct=result&resnum=1&ved=0CBUQ6AEwAA#v=onepage&q=SQL%20result%20cache%20automatically%20disabled&f=false
QUESTION NO: 4
Which is NOT among Oracle SQL Analytic functions included in Oracle Database 11g?
A. Ranking functions
B. Substring functions
C. Window aggregate functions
D. LAG/LEAD functions
E. All of the above
Answer: E
Explanation: All Functions are there in 11G
http://education.oracle.com/pls/web_prod-plqdad/ db_pages.getCourseDesc?dc=D52496GC10&p_org_id=68&lang=US
QUESTION NO: 5
How many Exadata Storage Server cells can be used in a grid?
A. 7
B. 14
C. 128
D. No practical limit
Answer: D
Explanation: http://www.pythian.com/news/1267/interview-kevin-closson-on-the-oracle-exadatastorage-server/
QUESTION NO: 6
Identify the action that you CANNOT perform using Database Resource Manager. A. Define Consumer Groups.
B. Create rules to map sessions to Consumer Groups.
C. Define a Resource Plan.
D. Allocate individual CPUs to Consumer Groups.
Answer: D
Explanation: http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/database/features/performance/resourcemanager-twp-133705.pdf
QUESTION NO: 7
You will be implementing a data warehouse for one of your customers. In your design process, which index type is most likely to be used to improve the performance of some queries where the data is of low cardinality?
A. Bitmap indexes
B. B*-tree indexes
C. Reverse indexes
D. Invisible indexes
Answer: A
Explanation: http://www.toadworld.com/Newsletter/TWPIPELINEJanFeb2010/PIPEJanFeb10Oracle/tabid/672/Default.aspx
QUESTION NO: 8
You think that result set caching might provide some benefits for your current data warehouse scenario. You perform some analysis on the composition of the queries used in the scenario. Identify the result of the analysis that would indicate the most potential for improvement with result set caching.
A. The scenario consists mainly of queries that are used infrequently.
B. The scenario consists mainly of queries that work on data which changes frequently.
C. The scenario consists mainly of queries with long run times and small result sets.
D. All data warehouse scenarios will benefit from result set caching.
Answer: C
QUESTION NO: 9
For data warehousing, identify the benefits that would NOT be provided by the use of RAC.
A. Distribute workload across all the nodes.
B. Distribute workload to some of the nodes.
C. Provide parallel query servers.
D. Provide high availability for all the operations.
Answer: B
QUESTION NO: 10
You want partitions to be automatically created when data that does not fit into current date range loaded. Which type of partitioning would you implement?
A. Hash
B. List
C. Invisible
D. Interval
Answer: D
Explanation: http://books.google.com/books?id=tdRes4IdLiIC&pg=PA303&lpg=PA303&dq=invisible+partitionin g+in+oracle&source=bl&ots=7QCZ1beter&sig=FXoQ-4F-tF3cB6HgYG8q3TWHrqc&hl=en&ei=I90- TcinE4aL4AaH1OWkCg&sa=X&oi=book_result&ct=result&resnum=5&ved=0CDQQ6AEwBA#v=o nepage&q=invisible%20partitioning%20in%20oracle&f=false
QUESTION NO: 11
Identify the benefit of using interval partitioning.
A. Automatic creation of new partitions based on hash values
B. Automatic creation of new partitions based on the value of data being entered C. Improved performance compared to range partitions
D. Automatic transfer of older partitions lower cost storage
Answer: B
Explanation: http://prutser.wordpress.com/2010/01/11/dropping-interval-partitions/
QUESTION NO: 12
Your customer wants to implement an ILM strategy. The customer must have which option when deploying Oracle's ILM Assistant to implement this strategy?
A. RAC
B. Partitioning
C. OLAP
D. Oracle Clusterware
Answer: B
Explanation: http://www.oracle.com/technology/deploy/ilm/index.html
QUESTION NO: 13
Why does partitioning help parallelism with RAC?
A. The ability to do partition-wise joins reduces interconnect traffic.
B. Partitioning allows you to split data storage across nodes.
C. Partitioning reduces storage requirements.
D. RAC will spawn additional parallel servers to meet the needs of requesting applications.
Answer: A
Explanation: http://download.oracle.com/docs/cd/A87860_01/doc/server.817/a76994/parpart.htm
QUESTION NO: 14
You are looking for some general design principles that could be used in designing every large scale data warehouse you create. Identify the principle that would have the widest applicability.
A. Partition your tables appropriately to produce partition-wise joins.
B. Always use a star schema or snowflake schema design.
C. Do as much analytics as possible in your BI tools.
D. Always use Oracle OLAP.
Answer: A
Explanation: http://www.oracleracsig.org/pls/apex/RAC_SIG.download_my_file?p_file=1002364
QUESTION NO: 15
What is the difference between an ETL (
Extraction Transformation LoaD. approach and an ELT (Extraction Load Transformation) approach to data integration?
A. ETL can operate between heterogeneous data sources.
B. ELT requires a separate transformation server.
C. ELT transforms data on the target server. D. ELT cannot be used for incremental data loading.
Indentify the true statement about REF partitions.
A. REF partitions have no impact on partition-wise joins.
B. Changes to partitioning in the parent table are automatically reflected in the child table.
C. Changes in the data in a parent table are reflected in a child table.
D. REF partitions can save storage space in the parent table.
Answer: B
Explanation: http://rajeshwaranbtech.blogspot.com/2010/06/ora-14652-in-reference-partitioningin. html
QUESTION NO: 2
Identify the control structure that would NOT be defined as part of a data flow with Oracle Data Integrator.
A. Loops
B. Conditions
C. Error handling
D. GOTOs
Answer: D
Explanation: http://www.oracle.com/global/hu/events/20080917/1_odi_odd_%20introduction_and_architecture.pdf
QUESTION NO: 3
For which type of query is the SQL result cache automatically disabled?
A. Queries that access data which changes frequently
B. Queries that return large amounts of data
C. Queries that use SQL functions such as SYSDATE
D. Queries that are used infrequently
Answer: C
Explanation: http://books.google.com/books?id=-4S6xQurmYC&pg=PA821&lpg=PA821&dq=SQL+result+cache+automatically+disabled&source=bl&ots=cmCLbFNfO-&sig=0EPaIT1ws3PkpqVhs-DSfalAnrQ&hl=en&ei=o8YTZtD0_fiBs6GzKUK&sa=X&oi=book_result&ct=result&resnum=1&ved=0CBUQ6AEwAA#v=onepage&q=SQL%20result%20cache%20automatically%20disabled&f=false
QUESTION NO: 4
Which is NOT among Oracle SQL Analytic functions included in Oracle Database 11g?
A. Ranking functions
B. Substring functions
C. Window aggregate functions
D. LAG/LEAD functions
E. All of the above
Answer: E
Explanation: All Functions are there in 11G
http://education.oracle.com/pls/web_prod-plqdad/ db_pages.getCourseDesc?dc=D52496GC10&p_org_id=68&lang=US
QUESTION NO: 5
How many Exadata Storage Server cells can be used in a grid?
A. 7
B. 14
C. 128
D. No practical limit
Answer: D
Explanation: http://www.pythian.com/news/1267/interview-kevin-closson-on-the-oracle-exadatastorage-server/
QUESTION NO: 6
Identify the action that you CANNOT perform using Database Resource Manager. A. Define Consumer Groups.
B. Create rules to map sessions to Consumer Groups.
C. Define a Resource Plan.
D. Allocate individual CPUs to Consumer Groups.
Answer: D
Explanation: http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/database/features/performance/resourcemanager-twp-133705.pdf
QUESTION NO: 7
You will be implementing a data warehouse for one of your customers. In your design process, which index type is most likely to be used to improve the performance of some queries where the data is of low cardinality?
A. Bitmap indexes
B. B*-tree indexes
C. Reverse indexes
D. Invisible indexes
Answer: A
Explanation: http://www.toadworld.com/Newsletter/TWPIPELINEJanFeb2010/PIPEJanFeb10Oracle/tabid/672/Default.aspx
QUESTION NO: 8
You think that result set caching might provide some benefits for your current data warehouse scenario. You perform some analysis on the composition of the queries used in the scenario. Identify the result of the analysis that would indicate the most potential for improvement with result set caching.
A. The scenario consists mainly of queries that are used infrequently.
B. The scenario consists mainly of queries that work on data which changes frequently.
C. The scenario consists mainly of queries with long run times and small result sets.
D. All data warehouse scenarios will benefit from result set caching.
Answer: C
QUESTION NO: 9
For data warehousing, identify the benefits that would NOT be provided by the use of RAC.
A. Distribute workload across all the nodes.
B. Distribute workload to some of the nodes.
C. Provide parallel query servers.
D. Provide high availability for all the operations.
Answer: B
QUESTION NO: 10
You want partitions to be automatically created when data that does not fit into current date range loaded. Which type of partitioning would you implement?
A. Hash
B. List
C. Invisible
D. Interval
Answer: D
Explanation: http://books.google.com/books?id=tdRes4IdLiIC&pg=PA303&lpg=PA303&dq=invisible+partitionin g+in+oracle&source=bl&ots=7QCZ1beter&sig=FXoQ-4F-tF3cB6HgYG8q3TWHrqc&hl=en&ei=I90- TcinE4aL4AaH1OWkCg&sa=X&oi=book_result&ct=result&resnum=5&ved=0CDQQ6AEwBA#v=o nepage&q=invisible%20partitioning%20in%20oracle&f=false
QUESTION NO: 11
Identify the benefit of using interval partitioning.
A. Automatic creation of new partitions based on hash values
B. Automatic creation of new partitions based on the value of data being entered C. Improved performance compared to range partitions
D. Automatic transfer of older partitions lower cost storage
Answer: B
Explanation: http://prutser.wordpress.com/2010/01/11/dropping-interval-partitions/
QUESTION NO: 12
Your customer wants to implement an ILM strategy. The customer must have which option when deploying Oracle's ILM Assistant to implement this strategy?
A. RAC
B. Partitioning
C. OLAP
D. Oracle Clusterware
Answer: B
Explanation: http://www.oracle.com/technology/deploy/ilm/index.html
QUESTION NO: 13
Why does partitioning help parallelism with RAC?
A. The ability to do partition-wise joins reduces interconnect traffic.
B. Partitioning allows you to split data storage across nodes.
C. Partitioning reduces storage requirements.
D. RAC will spawn additional parallel servers to meet the needs of requesting applications.
Answer: A
Explanation: http://download.oracle.com/docs/cd/A87860_01/doc/server.817/a76994/parpart.htm
QUESTION NO: 14
You are looking for some general design principles that could be used in designing every large scale data warehouse you create. Identify the principle that would have the widest applicability.
A. Partition your tables appropriately to produce partition-wise joins.
B. Always use a star schema or snowflake schema design.
C. Do as much analytics as possible in your BI tools.
D. Always use Oracle OLAP.
Answer: A
Explanation: http://www.oracleracsig.org/pls/apex/RAC_SIG.download_my_file?p_file=1002364
QUESTION NO: 15
What is the difference between an ETL (
Extraction Transformation LoaD. approach and an ELT (Extraction Load Transformation) approach to data integration?
A. ETL can operate between heterogeneous data sources.
B. ELT requires a separate transformation server.
C. ELT transforms data on the target server. D. ELT cannot be used for incremental data loading.
Answer: A,C
Oracle 1z0-515 Data Warehousing 11g Essentials 2/2
See the next post for the rest of the exam questions
Email ayman.rayyan@hotmail.com for a pdf/word version of the questions
All credit to him for compiling this list.
QUESTION NO: 35
Which unique method of improving performance is NOT used by the Oracle Exadata Database Machine?
A. Flash to improve query performance
B. Reduces the amount of data required to flow through I/O
C. Increases the I/O using InfiniBand
D. Performs analysis in a special in-memory database
Answer: D
Explanation: http://techsatwork.com/blog/?p=743
QUESTION NO: 36
You can perform what-if analysis of potential changes with Oracle Warehouse Builder.
A. TRUE
B. FALSE
Answer: A
Explanation:
QUESTION NO: 37
Identify the dimension that appears most often in queries in a data warehouse.
A. Product dimension
B. Time dimension
C. Cost dimension
D. Location dimension
Answer: A
Explanation: http://philip.greenspun.com/sql/data-warehousing.html
QUESTION NO: 38
Which questions CANNOT be addressed by Oracle Data Mining?
A. Fraud detection
B. Prediction of customer behavior
C. Root cause de
D. Identify factors associated with a business problem
Answer: C
Explanation:
QUESTION NO: 39
Which is NOT an available composite partition in Oracle Database 11g?
A. range-list
B. list-list
C. list-range
D. interval-hash
Answer: D
Explanation: http://www.oracle-base.com/articles/11g/PartitioningEnhancements_11gR1.php
QUESTION NO: 40
You are looking to create a RAC cluster to deliver high performance for your client's data warehouse. Which statement is true about a configuration with a few large nodes versus a configuration with n smaller nodes?
A. A few large nodes always perform better than many small nodes.
B. A few large nodes always perform worse than many small nodes.
C. It depends on the workload specifics and the effect of a node failure.
D. Performance should be the same with either option.
Answer: A
Explanation: http://www.oracle.com/us/solutions/datawarehousing/039574.pdf
QUESTION NO: 41
You can use Oracle Data Mining unstructured data.
A. TRUE
B. FALSE
Answer: A
Explanation: http://download.oracle.com/docs/cd/B28359_01/datamine.111/b28129.pdf
QUESTION NO: 42
How can you use Oracle Data Mining with Oracle Warehouse builder?
A. To identify records to extract
B. As a standard transform operation
C. To increase write performance
D. To eliminate ETL logging
Answer: B
Explanation: http://blogs.oracle.com/datamining/
QUESTION NO: 43
You customer wants to segment their customers1 demographic data into those that use and do not use loyalty card. What would you recommend?
A. Use Oracle OLAP Option.
B. Use Oracle SQL Analytic Functions. C. Use classification algorithm in Oracle Data Mining.
C. Use non-negative matrix factorization in Oracle Data Mining.
Answer: C
Explanation:
http://download.oracle.com/docs/cd/B28359_01/datamine.111/b28129/intro_concepts.htm
QUESTION NO: 44
One goal of your Information Lifecycle Management strategy using Oracle's ILM capabilities is to reduce e cost or online storage. Identify two database options that would help in enabling such a strategy.
A. RAC and Advanced Compression
B. RAC and Partitioning
C. Partitioning and Advanced Compression
D. RAC One and Advanced Compression
Answer: B,D
Explanation:
QUESTION NO: 45
Which can be used in scenario where there are large data loads °f a "me sensitive nature into a data warehouse?
A. Direct path loading
B. External tables for loading flat files
C. Partition exchange loading
D. Any of these are valid for certain situations.
Answer: A
Explanation:
http://download.oracle.com/docs/cd/B19306_01/server.102/b14215/ldr_modes.htm#i1008815
QUESTION NO: 46
How can you implement near real time data integration with Oracle Data Integrator?
A. By accessing Change Data Capture records from logs
B. By using Exchange Partition
C. By mining Oracle UNDO segments
D. By reading operating system logs
Answer: B
Explanation:
QUESTION NO: 47
Your customer wants to determine "market baskets." What do you recommend?
A. Use Oracle OLAP Option.
B. Use Oracle SQL Analytic Functions.
C. Use associations algorithm in Oracle Data Mining.
D. Use regression analysis in Oracle Data Mining
Answer: D
Explanation:http://download.oracle.com/docs/cd/B28359_01/datamine.111/b28129/regress.htm
QUESTION NO: 48
Identify the type of refresh that is NOT supported by materialized views.
A. Deferred
B. Incremental
C. Full
D. Heuristic
Answer: D
Explanation:http://download.oracle.com/docs/cd/B10500_01/server.920/a96520/mv.htm#42135
QUESTION NO: 49
For which task would you NOT use Oracle Data Mining?
A. Predicting customer behavior
B. Associating factors with a business issue
C. Determining associations within a population
D. Reducing the amount of data used in a data warehouse
E. All of the above
Answer: E
Explanation: For All above we can use Oracle Data Mining
http://portal.acm.org/citation.cfm?id=1157021
QUESTION NO: 50
What is the estimated maximum speed of data loads for a Quarter Rack with the Exadata Storage Server?
A. 1 TB/hr
B. 2 TB/hr
C. 4 TB/hr
D. 5 TB/hr
E. It depends on the number of CPUs in the server.
Answer: A
Explanation: http://techsatwork.com/blog/?p=743
QUESTION NO: 51
Your BI tool (for example, Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition Plus, Business Objects and Cognos) will be used to query an Oracle database that includes the Oracle OLAP Option. What does tool generate in submitting queries that might include data stored in relational tables and OLAP cubes?
A. SQL
B. PL/SQL
C. Proprietary API code
D. SQL for relational and proprietary API code for OLAP
Answer: B
Explanation:
QUESTION NO: 52
Data Guard compresses data:
A. Always
B. When using logical standby
C. When using physical standby
D. When catching up after a network failure
Answer: C
Explanation: http://forums.oracle.com/forums/thread.jspa?threadID=886988
QUESTION NO: 53
What are Oracle Data Integrator templates used for?
A. To model SAP applications
B. To define how to transform data
C. As reports to monitor ETL activity
D. None of these
Answer: B
Explanation: http://www.docstoc.com/docs/24079944/Oracle-Data-Integrator-Architecture
QUESTION NO: 54
Your BI tool (for example, Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition Cognos) will be used to query an Oracle database that includes the Oracle BI tool generate in submitting queries that might include data stored in cubes?
A. SQL
B. PIVSQL
C. Proprietary API code
D. SQL for relational and proprietary API code for OLAP
Answer: C
Explanation:
QUESTION NO: 55
How does compression affect resource utilization?
A. Reduces the amount of CPU and disk utilization
B. Increases the amount of CPU and disk utilization
C. Reduces the amount of disk but increases CPU utilization for loading
D. Increases the amount of disk but reduces CPU utilization for loading!
Answer: C
Explanation: http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/tividd/td/ITSMFD/SC32-9065-00/en_US/HTML/ab5w0007.htm
QUESTION NO: 56
Your customer wants to use Database Resource Manager to help ensure consistent performance based on users and operations. In designing this implementation, which limitation CANNOT be imposed through Database Resource Manager?
A. Specifying the maximum number of concurrent operations for a resource group
B. Limiting resource consumption for a resource group
C. Specifying the amount of parallelism for a resource group
D. Limiting access to particular data for a resource group
Answer: A
Explanation:
QUESTION NO: 57
How many Exadata Storage Server cells are there in a Full Rack Exadata database machine configuration that has 8 Database Server nodes?
A. 2
B. 14
C. 16
D. 24
Answer: B
Explanation:
QUESTION NO: 58
Identify the true statement about adaptive parallelism.
A. It Is turned on by default.
B. It is turned off by default.
C. You should always leave the default setting
D. There is no such thing.
Answer: B
Explanation: http://kerryosborne.oracle-guy.com/category/oracle/exadata/page/3/
QUESTION NO: 59
Identify the statement about Oracle OLAP that is NOT true.
A. Oracle OLAP cubes are stored in the Oracle relational database
B. Oracle OLAP uses standard Oracle database security.
C. Meta data for Oracle OLAP is accessible in an external data dictionary
D. Oracle OU\P can be deployed using RAC.
Answer: A
Explanation: http://download.oracle.com/docs/cd/B28359_01/olap.111/b28124/whatsnew.htm
According to the answer; "Oracle OLAP uses standard Oracle database security." is a false
statement and "Meta data for Oracle OLAP is accessible in an external data dictionary" is a correct
statement. But in Oracle documentation, http://download.oracle.com/docs/cd/E11882_01/olap.112/e17123/overview.htm#i1
011393 ; is says "With Oracle OLAP, standard Oracle Database security features are used to
22 secure your multidimensional data.".
QUESTION NO: 60
Identity the true statement about a data warehouse
A. The data warehouse is typically refreshed as often as a transactional system,
B. Data warehouse queries are simpler than OLTP queries.
C. A data warehouse typically contains historical data.
D. Queries against a data warehouse never need summarized information.
Answer: C
Explanation: http://wiki.oracle.com/page/Oracle+OLAP+Terminology-D
QUESTION NO: 61
Identify the statement about ASM that is NOT true.
A. ASM is easier to manage than file systems.
B. ASM delivers the performance of raw partitions.
C. ASM is an extra cost option for Oracle databases.
D. ASM delivers automatic striping and mirroring.
Answer: B
Explanation:http://download.oracle.com/docs/cd/B28359_01/server.111/b31107/asmprepare.htm
QUESTION NO: 62
Which two statements are true about the advantages of using a data warehouse?
A. A data warehouse uses fewer database structures, so access to answers is faster and easier
B. A data warehouse is typically implemented with a different design, making access faster.
C. A data warehouse is optimized for ongoing write activity, making response faster.
D. A data warehouse uses specialized features of the Oracle database, like materialized views and star transformations, making response faster.
Answer: A,D
Explanation:
QUESTION NO: 63
What are two ways in which query performance can be improved with partitioning?
A. Partition pruning
B. Partition optimization
C. Partition compression
D. Partition-wise joins
Answer: A,D
Explanation:
QUESTION NO: 64
Your customer is looking to implement ad-hoc analysis in a data warehouse. Which approach is least likely to be used assuming that the customer does not want the expense of managing view?
A. Star schema
B. Snowflake schema
C. Third normal form schema
D. OLAP
Answer: A
Explanation:
QUESTION NO: 65
You have analyzed your client's workload and the Materialized Views Advisor in Enterprise Manager recommends that you create some materialized views to improve performance. What should you do in order to most simply implement this change?
A. Rewrite all the queries in the application to identify materialized view
B. Rewrite existing queries. New queries will automatically use the views.
C. Respond positively to the Advisor to create the materialized views.
D. Build virtual views on a third normal form schema.
Answer: C
Explanation:
QUESTION NO: 66
A Full Rack Oracle Exadata Database Machine can contain 100 TB of disk space with high performance. How much user data should you conservatively estimate this configuration can hold?
A. 100 TB
B. 75 TB
C. 50 TB
D. 28 TB
E. 20 TB
Answer: A
Explanation:
QUESTION NO: 67
What would you do to compress data in partitions that are frequently updated in Oracle Database 11g?
A. Use Hybrid Columnar Compression.
B. Use Advanced Compression Option.
C. Use Hybrid Partitions.
D. Avoid compressing any data.
Answer: A
Explanation:
http://blogs.oracle.com/datawarehousing/2010/01/new_whitepaper_on_exadata_hybr.html
QUESTION NO: 68
The Analytic Workspace Manager would be used to generate_______.
A. Materialized views
B. Oracle OLAP Option cubes
C. Oracle Data Mining algorithms
D. Oracle SQL Analytic functions
Answer: B
Explanation: http://forums.oracle.com/forums/thread.jspa?threadID=616811
QUESTION NO: 69
Which feature of Oracle Warehouse Builder can be used to help ensure data quality?
A. Data extraction
B. Data profiling
C. Logical mapping
D. Exception reporting
Answer: A
Explanation:
QUESTION NO: 70
Flash in the Oracle Exadata Database Machine is of lower latency (and enables faster access to data) than:
A. Memory
B. Memory and locally attached disk
C. Memory and network-attached disk
D. Locally attached and network-attached disk
Answer: B
Explanation:
Oracle EXAM 1Z0-515 Data Warehousing 11g Essentials
Total Questions: 70
Question: 1
Indentify the true statement about REF partitions. A. REF partitions have no impact on partition-wise joins. B. Changes to partitioning in the parent table are automatically reflected in the child table. C. Changes in the data in a parent table are reflected in a child table. D. REF partitions can save storage space in the parent table.
Answer: B
Explanation: http://rajeshwaranbtech.blogspot.com/2010/06/ora-14652-in-reference-partitioningin. html
Question: 2
Identify the control structure that would NOT be defined as part of a data flow with Oracle Data Integrator. A. Loops B. Conditions C. Error handling D. GOTOs
Answer: D
Explanation: http://www.oracle.com/global/hu/events/20080917/1_odi_odd_%20introduction_and_architecture.pdf
Question: 3
For which type of query is the SQL result cache automatically disabled? A. Queries that access data which changes frequently B. Queries that return large amounts of data C. Queries that use SQL functions such as SYSDATE D. Queries that are used infrequently
Answer: C
Explanation: http://books.google.com/books?id=-4S6xQurmYC&pg=PA821&lpg=PA821&dq=SQL+result+cache+automatically+disabled&source=bl&ots=cmCLbFNfO-&sig=0EPaIT1ws3PkpqVhs-DSfalAnrQ&hl=en&ei=o8YTZtD0_fiBs6GzKUK&sa=X&oi=book_result&ct=result&resnum=1&ved=0CBUQ6AEwAA#v=onepage&q=SQL%20result%20cache%20automatically%20disabled&f=false
Question: 4
Which is NOT among Oracle SQL Analytic functions included in Oracle Database 11g? A. Ranking functions B. Substring functions C. Window aggregate functions D. LAG/LEAD functions E. All of the above
Answer: E
Explanation: Correct Answer: All Functions are there in 11G http://education.oracle.com/pls/web_prod-plqdad/ db_pages.getCourseDesc?dc=D52496GC10&p_org_id=68&lang=US
Question: 5
How many Exadata Storage Server cells can be used in a grid? A. 7 B. 14 C. 128 D. No practical limit
Answer: D
Explanation: http://www.pythian.com/news/1267/interview-kevin-closson-on-the-oracle-exadatastorage-server/
Question: 6
Identify the action that you CANNOT perform using Database Resource Manager. A. Define Consumer Groups. B. Create rules to map sessions to Consumer Groups. C. Define a Resource Plan. D. Allocate individual CPUs to Consumer Groups.
Answer: D
Explanation: http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/database/features/performance/resourcemanager-twp-133705.pdf
Question: 7
You will be implementing a data warehouse for one of your customers. In your design process, which index type is most likely to be used to improve the performance of some queries where the data is of low cardinality? A. Bitmap indexes B. B*-tree indexes C. Reverse indexes D. Invisible indexes
Answer: A
Explanation: http://www.toadworld.com/Newsletter/TWPIPELINEJanFeb2010/PIPEJanFeb10Oracle/tabid/672/Default.aspx
Question: 8
You think that result set caching might provide some benefits for your current data warehouse scenario. You perform some analysis on the composition of the queries used in the scenario. Identify the result of the analysis that would indicate the most potential for improvement with result set caching. A. The scenario consists mainly of queries that are used infrequently. B. The scenario consists mainly of queries that work on data which changes frequently. C. The scenario consists mainly of queries with long run times and small result sets. D. All data warehouse scenarios will benefit from result set caching.
Answer: C
Question: 9
For data warehousing, identify the benefits that would NOT be provided by the use of RAC. A. Distribute workload across all the nodes. B. Distribute workload to some of the nodes. C. Provide parallel query servers. D. Provide high availability for all the operations.
Answer: B
Question: 10
You want partitions to be automatically created when data that does not fit into current date range loaded. Which type of partitioning would you implement? A. Hash B. List C. Invisible D. Interval
Answer: D
Explanation: http://books.google.com/books?id=tdRes4IdLiIC&pg=PA303&lpg=PA303&dq=invisible+partitionin g+in+oracle&source=bl&ots=7QCZ1beter&sig=FXoQ-4F-tF3cB6HgYG8q3TWHrqc&hl=en&ei=I90- TcinE4aL4AaH1OWkCg&sa=X&oi=book_result&ct=result&resnum=5&ved=0CDQQ6AEwBA#v=o nepage&q=invisible%20partitioning%20in%20oracle&f=false
Question: 11
Identify the benefit of using interval partitioning. A. Automatic creation of new partitions based on hash values B. Automatic creation of new partitions based on the value of data being entered C. Improved performance compared to range partitions D. Automatic transfer of older partitions lower cost storage
Answer: B
Explanation: http://prutser.wordpress.com/2010/01/11/dropping-interval-partitions/
Question: 12
Your customer wants to implement an ILM strategy. The customer must have which option when deploying Oracle's ILM Assistant to implement this strategy? A. RAC B. Partitioning C. OLAP D. Oracle Clusterware
Answer: B
Explanation: http://www.oracle.com/technology/deploy/ilm/index.html
Question: 13
Why does partitioning help parallelism with RAC? A. The ability to do partition-wise joins reduces interconnect traffic. B. Partitioning allows you to split data storage across nodes. C. Partitioning reduces storage requirements. D. RAC will spawn additional parallel servers to meet the needs of requesting applications.
Answer: A
Explanation: http://download.oracle.com/docs/cd/A87860_01/doc/server.817/a76994/parpart.htm
Question: 14
You are looking for some general design principles that could be used in designing every large scale data warehouse you create. Identify the principle that would have the widest applicability. A. Partition your tables appropriately to produce partition-wise joins. B. Always use a star schema or snowflake schema design. C. Do as much analytics as possible in your BI tools. D. Always use Oracle OLAP.
Answer: A
Explanation: http://www.oracleracsig.org/pls/apex/RAC_SIG.download_my_file?p_file=1002364
Question: 15
What is the difference between an ETL (Extraction Transformation LoaD. approach and an ELT (Extraction Load Transformation) approach to data integration? A. ETL can operate between heterogeneous data sources. B. ELT requires a separate transformation server. C. ELT transforms data on the target server. D. ELT cannot be used for incremental data loading.
Answer: A,C
Question: 16
Identify the benefit of using bitmap join indexes. A. Faster query performance for all queries. B. Reduced space for indexes. C. Faster query performance for some queries. D. Lower memory usage.
Answer: C,D
Explanation: http://www.stanford.edu/dept/itss/docs/oracle/10g/server.101/b10736/indexes.htm#CIHGAFFF
Question: 17
What data can you compress using Advanced Compression in Oracle Database 11g? A. Read only data B. Data that can be updated, inserted and/or deleted (DML) C. Only data being archived D. Data warehousing data
Answer: B
Explanation: https://ophelia.cs.put.poznan.pl/webdav/dbdw/students/dbdwsummer_ 2009/lectures/etl.pdf
Question: 18
Which best describes Oracle's OLAP Option for Oracle Database 11g Release 2? A. Is stored as relational tables and is considered a ROLAP solution B. Uses bitmap indexes C. Physically stores MOU\P cubes as objects within the relational database D. Is available both within the Oracle Database and as a stand-alone solution
Answer: A,B
Question: 19
The most performant way to load data from an external table that will also guarantee direct path loading is: A. Using Create Table as Select (CTAS) B. Using Data Pump C. Using Insert as Select (IAS) D. Using transparent gateways
Answer: A
Explanation: http://www.filibeto.org/sun/lib/nonsun/oracle/11.1.0.6.0/B28359_01/server.111/b28310/tables004.htm
Question: 20
You want to create an optimally performing data warehouse hardware configuration for your customer. Which way of creating a hardware configuration will reduce the implementation time the most? A. Use reference configurations or an appliance-like configuration. B. Use the existing system and add on relevant components. C. Customize a configuration from a vendor. D. Build the system from scratch.
Answer: A
Question: 21
Which statement is true for you to get the benefits of partition-wise joins? A. The parent table must be partitioned on the join Key and the child table must be partitioned on] the join key. B. The parent table must be partitioned on the primary key and the child table must be partition the join key. C. The child table must use a reference partition. D. The parent table must be partitioned on the primary key and the child table must use a ref partition.
Answer: D
Explanation: http://oracle.su/docs/11g/server.112/e10837/partition.htm
Question: 22
What would you use to evenly distribute data across the disk in your Oracle data warehouse? A. Range Partitioning B. Automatic Storage Management (ASM) C. List Partitioning D. RAC
Answer: B
Explanation: http://download.oracle.com/docs/cd/B28359_01/server.111/b28314/tdpdw_system.htm
Question: 23
HI want to enable result set caching to quickly see if this feature will help the performance of your application. Which is the quickest way to make this determination? A. Set RESULT_CACHE_MODE = FORCE in the initialization file. B. Set RESULT_CACHE = ENABLED in the initialization file. C. Set RESULT_CACHE_MAX_SIZE = 0. D. Set RESULT_CACHE = ENABLED in the initialization file and use a RESULT_CACHE hint in queries.
Answer: A
Explanation: http://www.globusz.com/ebooks/Oracle11g/00000014.htm
Question: 24
Which is NOT an advantage provided by partitioning? A. Reduces storage requirements for tables B. Can add to the benefits of parallelism through parallel partition-wise joins C. Can improve performance by reducing I/O D. Provides added flexibility for maintenance operations
Answer: C
Question: 25
Which condition can cause a change in the contents of the SQL Result Set Cache? A. SQL result sets age out of the Result Set Cache based on the KEEP parameter. B. SQL result sets are invalidated in the Result Set Cache after DML is performed against any of tables in the SQL query. C. SQL result sets are pinned in the Result Set Cache with the KEEP parameter. D. None of these would cause a change.
Answer: A
Explanation: http://download.oracle.com/docs/cd/B19306_01/server.102/b14220/memory.htm
Question: 26
What areas can SQL Access Advisor give advice on? A. Partitioning advice, index advice, and materialized views advice B. Index advice and compression advice C. Index advice and data masking advice D. Partitioning advice and compression advice
Answer: A
Explanation: http://www.oracle-base.com/articles/11g/SQLAccessAdvisor_11gR1.php
Question: 27
You are looking to size a data warehouse configuration. If the I/O throughput for the CPUs is 25 GB/s, the I/O throughput for the HBA is 18 GB/s, and the I/O throughput for the disk subsystem is 6 GB/s, what is the overall throughput of the data warehouse? A. 25 GB/s B. 18 GB/s C. 6 GB/s D. It depends on how many processors are in the servers.
Answer: D
Explanation: http://download.oracle.com/docs/cd/E11882_01/server.112/e10578/tdpdw_system.htm
Question: 28
What are three advantages provided by proper partitioning in a data warehouse? A. Partition pruning will occur B. Faster sorting C. Efficient parallel joins D. Efficient data loading E. Reduced disk usage
Answer: A,C,D
Explanation: http://www.databasejournal.com/features/oracle/article.php/3317621/A-Practical- Guide-to-Data-Warehousing-in-Oracle---Part-3.htm
Question: 29
Exadata uses smart scans, which are executed in________. A. Exadata Storage Server cells B. Database Server node memory C. Database Server node CPUs D. Exadata does not use smart scans.
Answer: A
Explanation: http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/database/exadata/index.html
Question: 30
Identify the indexing technique you would use to minimize partition maintenance. A. Local indexes B. Global partitioned indexes C. Global nonpartitioned indexes D. Both global partitioned and global nonpartitioned indexes
Answer: A
Explanation: http://www.stanford.edu/dept/itss/docs/oracle/10g/server.101/b10743/partconc.htm
Question: 31
Which feature would enable higher availability during maintenance operations while also improving query response performance? A. Partitioning B. Materialized views C. Bitmap Indexing D. OLAP
Answer: A
Explanation: http://www.stanford.edu/dept/itss/docs/oracle/10g/server.101/b10743/partconc.htm
Question: 32
What two types of results can be cached in the Result Set Cache? A. Results of an SQL query B. Results from a PL/SQL function C. Sequence object results D. Result sets derived from data dictionary tables
Answer: A,B
Explanation: http://download.oracle.com/docs/cd/B28359_01/java.111/b31224/stmtcach.htm
Question: 33
Knowledge Modules are: A. Reusable code templates for Oracle Data Integrator B. Prebuilt applications for Oracle Business Intelligence C. Options for Oracle Enterprise Manager D. Algorithms for data mining
Answer: A
Explanation: http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/articles/bethke-odi-090881.html
Question: 34
Which Oracle option might be used to encrypt sensitive data in an Oracle data warehouse? A. Active Data Guard B. Total Recall C. Advanced Security Option D. Virtual Private Database
Answer: C
Explanation: http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/database/options/advanced-security/ds-securityadvanced-security-11gr2-1-129479.pdf
Question: 35
Which unique method of improving performance is NOT used by the Oracle Exadata Database Machine? A. Flash to improve query performance B. Reduces the amount of data required to flow through I/O C. Increases the I/O using InfiniBand D. Performs analysis in a special in-memory database
Answer: D
Explanation: http://techsatwork.com/blog/?p=743
Question: 36
You can perform what-if analysis of potential changes with Oracle Warehouse Builder. A. TRUE B. FALSE
Answer: A
Question: 37
Indentify the dimension that appears most often in queries in a data warehouse. A. Product dimension B. Time dimension C. Cost dimension D. Location dimension
Answer: A
Explanation: http://philip.greenspun.com/sql/data-warehousing.html
Question: 38
Which questions CANNOT be addressed by Oracle Data Mining? A. Fraud detection B. Prediction of customer behavior C. Root cause de D. Identify factors associated with a business problem
Answer: C
Question: 39
Which is NOT an available composite partition in Oracle Database 11g? A. range-list B. list-list C. list-range D. interval-hash
Answer: D
Explanation: http://www.oracle-base.com/articles/11g/PartitioningEnhancements_11gR1.php
Question: 40
You are looking to create a RAC cluster to deliver high performance for your client's data warehouse. Which statement is true about a configuration with a few large nodes versus a configuration with n smaller nodes? A. A few large nodes always perform better than many small nodes. B. A few large nodes always perform worse than many small nodes. C. It depends on the workload specifics and the effect of a node failure. D. Performance should be the same with either option.
Answer: A
Explanation: http://www.oracle.com/us/solutions/datawarehousing/039574.pdf
Question: 41
You can use Oracle Data Mining unstructured data. A. TRUE B. FALSE
Answer: A
Explanation: http://download.oracle.com/docs/cd/B28359_01/datamine.111/b28129.pdf
Question: 42
How can you use Oracle Data Mining with Oracle Warehouse builder? A. To identify records to extract B. As a standard transform operation C. To increase write performance D. To eliminate ETL logging
Answer: B
Explanation: http://blogs.oracle.com/datamining/
Question: 43
You customer wants to segment their customers1 demographic data into those that use and do not use loyalty card. What would you recommend? A. Use Oracle OLAP Option. B. Use Oracle SQL Analytic Functions. C. Use classification algorithm in Oracle Data Mining. C. Use non-negative matrix factorization in Oracle Data Mining.
Answer: C
Explanation: http://download.oracle.com/docs/cd/B28359_01/datamine.111/b28129/intro_concepts.htm
Question: 44
One goal of your Information Lifecycle Management strategy using Oracle's ILM capabilities is to reduce e cost or online storage. Identify two database options that would help in enabling such a strategy. A. RAC and Advanced Compression B. RAC and Partitioning C. Partitioning and Advanced Compression D. RAC One and Advanced Compression
Answer: B,D
Question: 45
Which can be used in scenario where there are large data loads °f a "me sensitive nature into a data warehouse? A. Direct path loading B. External tables for loading flat files C. Partition exchange loading D. Any of these are valid for certain situations.
Answer: A
Explanation: http://download.oracle.com/docs/cd/B19306_01/server.102/b14215/ldr_modes.htm#i1008815
Question: 46
How can you implement near real time data integration with Oracle Data Integrator? A. By accessing Change Data Capture records from logs B. By using Exchange Partition C. By mining Oracle UNDO segments D. By reading operating system logs
Answer: B
Question: 47
Your customer wants to determine "market baskets." What do you recommend? A. Use Oracle OLAP Option. B. Use Oracle SQL Analytic Functions. C. Use associations algorithm in Oracle Data Mining. D. Use regression analysis in Oracle Data Mining
Answer: D
Explanation: http://download.oracle.com/docs/cd/B28359_01/datamine.111/b28129/regress.htm
Question: 48
Identify the type of refresh that is NOT supported by materialized views. A. Deferred B. Incremental C. Full D. Heuristic
Answer: D
Explanation: http://download.oracle.com/docs/cd/B10500_01/server.920/a96520/mv.htm#42135
Question: 49
For which task would you NOT use Oracle Data Mining? A. Predicting customer behavior B. Associating factors with a business issue C. Determining associations within a population D. Reducing the amount of data used in a data warehouse E. All of the above
Answer: E
Explanation: For All above we can use Oracle Data Mining http://portal.acm.org/citation.cfm?id=1157021
Question: 50
What is the estimated maximum speed of data loads for a Quarter Rack with the Exadata Storage Server? A. 1 TB/hr B. 2 TB/hr C. 4 TB/hr D. 5 TB/hr E. It depends on the number of CPUs in the server.
Answer: A
Explanation: http://techsatwork.com/blog/?p=743
Question: 51
Your BI tool (for example, Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition Plus, Business Objects and Cognos) will be used to query an Oracle database that includes the Oracle OLAP Option What does tool generate in submitting queries that might include data stored in relational tables and OLAP cubes? A. SQL B. PL/SQL C. Proprietary API code D. SQL for relational and proprietary API code for OLAP
Answer: B
Question: 52
Data Guard compresses data: A. Always B. When using logical standby C. When using physical standby D. When catching up after a network failure
Answer: C
Explanation: http://forums.oracle.com/forums/thread.jspa?threadID=886988
Question: 53
What are Oracle Data Integrator templates used for? A. To model SAP applications B. To define how to transform data C. As reports to monitor ETL activity D. None of these
Answer: B
Explanation: http://www.docstoc.com/docs/24079944/Oracle-Data-Integrator-Architecture
Question: 54
Your BI tool (for example, Oracle Business Intelligence Enterprise Edition Cognos) will be used to query an Oracle database that includes the Oracle BI tool generate in submitting queries that might include data stored in cubes? A. SQL B. PIVSQL C. Proprietary API code D. SQL for relational and proprietary API code for OLAP
Answer: C
Question: 55
How does compression affect resource utilization? A. Reduces the amount of CPU and disk utilization B. Increases the amount of CPU and disk utilization C. Reduces the amount of disk but increases CPU utilization for loading D. Increases the amount of disk but reduces CPU utilization for loading!
Answer: C
Explanation: http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/tividd/td/ITSMFD/SC32-9065-00/en_US/HTML/ab5w0007.htm
Question: 56
Your customer wants to use Database Resource Manager to help ensure consistent performance based on users and operations. In designing this implementation, which limitation CANNOT be imposed through Database Resource Manager? A. Specifying the maximum number of concurrent operations for a resource group B. Limiting resource consumption for a resource group C. Specifying the amount of parallelism for a resource group D. Limiting access to particular data for a resource group
Answer: A
Question: 57
How many Exadata Storage Server cells are there in a Full Rack Exadata database machine configuration that has 8 Database Server nodes? A. 2 B. 14 C. 16 D. 24
Answer: B
Question: 58
Identify the true statement about adaptive parallelism. A. It Is turned on by default. B. It is turned off by default. C. You should always leave the default setting D. There is no such thing.
Answer: B
Explanation: http://kerryosborne.oracle-guy.com/category/oracle/exadata/page/3/
Question: 59
Identify the statement about Oracle OLAP that is NOT true. A. Oracle OLAP cubes are stored in the Oracle relational database B. Oracle OLAP uses standard Oracle database security. C. Meta data for Oracle OLAP is accessible in an external data dictionary D. Oracle OU\P can be deployed using RAC.
Answer: A
Explanation: http://download.oracle.com/docs/cd/B28359_01/olap.111/b28124/whatsnew.htm According to the answer; "Oracle OLAP uses standard Oracle database security." is a false statement and "Meta data for Oracle OLAP is accessible in an external data dictionary" is a correct statement. But in Oracle documentation, http://download.oracle.com/docs/cd/E11882_01/olap.112/e17123/overview.htm#i1 011393; is says "With Oracle OLAP, standard Oracle Database security features are used to secure your multidimensional data.".
Question: 60
Identity the true statement about a data warehouse A. The data warehouse is typically refreshed as often as a transactional system, B. Data warehouse queries are simpler than OLTP queries. C. A data warehouse typically contains historical data. D. Queries against a data warehouse never need summarized information.
Answer: C
Explanation: http://wiki.oracle.com/page/Oracle+OLAP+Terminology-D
Question: 61
Identify the statement about ASM that is NOT true. A. ASM is easier to manage than file systems. B. ASM delivers the performance of raw partitions. C. ASM is an extra cost option for Oracle databases. D. ASM delivers automatic striping and mirroring.
Answer: B
Explanation: http://download.oracle.com/docs/cd/B28359_01/server.111/b31107/asmprepare.htm
Question: 62
Which two statements are true about the advantages of using a data warehouse? A. A data warehouse uses fewer database structures, so access to answers is faster and easier B. A data warehouse is typically implemented with a different design, making access faster. C. A data warehouse is optimized for ongoing write activity, making response faster. D. A data warehouse uses specialized features of the Oracle database, like materialized views and star transformations, making response faster.
Answer: A,D
Question: 63
What are two ways in which query performance can be improved with partitioning? A. Partition pruning B. Partition optimization C. Partition compression D. Partition-wise joins
Answer: A,D
Question: 64
Your customer is looking to implement ad-hoc analysis in a data warehouse. Which approach is least likely to be used assuming that the customer does not want the expense of managing view? A. Star schema B. Snowflake schema C. Third normal form schema D. OLAP
Answer: A
Question: 65
You have analyzed your client's workload and the Materialized Views Advisor in Enterprise Manager recommends that you create some materialized views to improve performance. What should you do in order to most simply implement this change? A. Rewrite all the queries in the application to identify materialized view B. Rewrite existing queries. New queries will automatically use the views. C. Respond positively to the Advisor to create the materialized views. D. Build virtual views on a third normal form schema.
Answer: C
Question: 66
A Full Rack Oracle Exadata Database Machine can contain 100 TB of disk space with high performance. How much user data should you conservatively estimate this configuration can hold? A. 100 TB B. 75 TB C. 50 TB D. 28 TB E. 20 TB
Answer: A
Question: 67
What would you do to compress data in partitions that are frequently updated in Oracle Database 11g? A. Use Hybrid Columnar Compression. B. Use Advanced Compression Option. C. Use Hybrid Partitions. D. Avoid compressing any data.
Answer: A
Explanation: http://blogs.oracle.com/datawarehousing/2010/01/new_whitepaper_on_exadata_hybr.html
Question: 68
The Analytic Workspace Manager would be used to generate_______. A. Materialized views B. Oracle OLAP Option cubes C. Oracle Data Mining algorithms D. Oracle SQL Analytic functions
Answer: B
Explanation: http://forums.oracle.com/forums/thread.jspa?threadID=616811
Question: 69
Which feature of Oracle Warehouse Builder can be used to help ensure data quality? A. Data extraction B. Data profiling C. Logical mapping D. Exception reporting
Answer: A
Question: 70
Flash in the Oracle Exadata Database Machine is of lower latency (and enables faster access to data) than: A. Memory B. Memory and locally attached disk C. Memory and network-attached disk D. Locally attached and network-attached disk
Answer: B
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 1 of 64
Question: 1
You located a file created in /home successfully by using the slocate command. You found that
the slocate command could locate that file even after deletion. What could be the possible
solution to stop listing deleted files? (Choose all that apply.)
A. Run updatedb to update the database.
B. Run slocate -u to update the database.
C. Use the locate command instead of slocate.
D. Delete the /var/lib/slocate/slocate.db file because it buffers all search results.
E. Reboot the system so that it will update the kernel memory because the kernel stores all
results in the memory.
Answer: A, B
Question: 2
As an administrator, you mounted the /exports/projects NFS exported directory from a server on a
LAN using the default NFS settings. You find the performance to be low. Which NFS mount
options can you use to increase the performance?
A. set rsize=8192 and wsize=8192.
B. set rsize=32768 and wsize=32768.
C. set wsize=8192 and keep the read packet size at the default.
D. set rsize=8192 and keep the write packet size at the default.
E. set rsize=32768 and keep the write packet size at the default.
F. set wsize=32768 and keep the read packet size at the default.
Answer: A
Question: 3
Two users, bob on station1 and smith on station2, generated a public/private key pair using sshkeygen
to enable password-less secure shell login between them. What would be their next step
to accomplish the task?
A. Copy the private key of bob to station2:~smith and vice versa.
B. Copy the key pair of bob to station2:~smith/.ssh as public and private keys.
C. Copy the private key of bob to station2:~smith/.ssh/authorized_keys and vice versa.
D. Copy the public key of bob to station1:~smith/.ssh/authorized_keys and vice versa.
E. Copy the public key of bob to station2:~smith/.ssh/authorized_keys and vice versa.
Answer: E
Question: 4
Exhibit:
As a Linux administrator, you have to let the users smith and scott manage files and directories in
the /software directory on their own, with full permissions between each other's files. What are the
most essential steps needed to grant them the required privileges? (Choose all that apply.)
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 2 of 64
A. Add SUID on /software.
B. Add 777 permissions on /software.
C. Add u=--- permissions on /software.
D. Add scott as a member of the apps group.
E. Add rwx permissions for the apps group on /software.
Answer: D, E
Question: 5
Exhibit:
A normal user bob logs in from server200 to server1 through telnet and runs the xclock command
but fails with an error message as shown in the Exhibit. What could be the possible reason for the
error?
A. This is because gdm is not started on the machine.
B. This is because of the temporary failure in name resolution.
C. This is because the default X access controls do not permit remote connections.
D. This is because the graphical display manager is not configured to allow TCP connections.
Answer: D
Question: 6
What is the effect of issuing ZZ and ZQ in the vi editor command mode?
A. The command ZZ will zoom in the vi editor command mode and ZQ will zoom out the view.
B. The command ZZ will thrash all changes, whereas ZQ will ask for confirmation before saving.
C. The command ZZ will save changes and exit, whereas ZQ will exit the editor without saving
changes.
D. The command ZZ will exit the editor without saving changes, whereas ZQ will save changes
and exit.
Answer: C
Question: 7
You have logged in as root and have invoked the mount command without any options to mount
the device /dev/hda8 mount /dev/hda8. What does mount do in this context? (Choose two.)
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 3 of 64
A. It checks the /etc/mtab for the required options to mount the device.
B. It checks the /etc/fstab for the required options and the mount point to mount the device.
C. It checks the /etc/inittab for the required options and the mount point to mount the device.
D. It reports an error message "mount point doesn't exist" if the entry for /dev/hda8 doesn't exist
in the /etc/fstab file.
Answer: B, D
Question: 8
Which command would you use to save the name of all the users in your system in alphabetical
order to a newfile file after removing the duplicate entries?
A. cut -f1 -d: /etc/passwd | sort | uniq | > newfile
B. cut -f1 -d: /etc/passwd | sort -d | uniq > newfile
C. cut -f1 -d: /etc/passwd | sort -a | uniq | newfile
D. cut -f1 -d: < /etc/passwd | sort | uniq | less < newfile
Answer: B
Question: 9
Which four statements are true about the find command in Linux? (Choose four.)
A. The user can specify how to process the files.
B. The user can specify where to search (pathname).
C. The user can specify what type of file to search for.
D. The user can specify to perform logical operations on selections.
E. The user can search and replace the contents of files with find.
F. The user cannot find recently added files or directories on the system.
Answer: A, B, C, D
Question: 10
The user smith wants to display the total number of lines that are 4 characters (letters and digits)
long or more from the file1.txt file. Which regular expression or command should smith use?
A. egrep "^[[:alnum:]]{4,}$" file1.txt | wc -l
B. egrep "^[[:alpha:]]{4,}$" file1.txt | wc -l
C. egrep "^[[:alpha:]]{4,}$" file1.txt | wc -w
D. egrep "^[[:alnum:]]{4,}$" file1.txt | wc -c
Answer: A
Question: 11
Match the following shell special characters with their usage:
1) \ a) used in pairs to quote other special characters so they will not be interpreted by the
shell or to embed blanks
2) ' ? b) variable substitution
3) { } ~ c) used to escape the special meaning of the next character
4) $ d) wildcard file name expansion
A. 1-c, 2-b, 3-a, 4-d
B. 1-b, 2-d, 3-c, 4-a
C. 1-c, 2-a, 3-d, 4-b
D. 1-c, 2-a, 3-b, 4-d
E. 1-d, 2-a, 3-c, 4-b
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 4 of 64
F. 1-d, 2-c, 3, b, 4-a
Answer: C
Question: 12
Match the commands with their functions:
1. make a. installs the software to the target directory specified during configure, but
typically defaults to /usr/local/subtree
2. configure script b. calls the compiler and linker as specified by the Makefile
3. make install c. creates the necessary Makefiles based on the user information
A. 1-c, 2-a, 3-b
B. 1-b, 2-c, 3-a
C. 1-a, 2-c, 3-b
D. 1-c, 2-b, 3-a
Answer: B
Question: 13
You have the /tools directory on a system with critical system files reserved for future use. As a
Linux administrator which command would you use to protect these files from a user who might
get the UID or GID as shown below?
[root@server1 ~]# ls -ld /tools/
drwxrwx--- 108 517 527 4096 Mar 26 20:00 /tools/
A. chmod o+t /tools
B. chmod u+s /tools
C. chown -R 0.0 /tools
D. chown -R nobody.nobody /tools
Answer: C
Question: 14
Identify the two main branches from the UNIX family tree, where the cross-pollination between
these branches was responsible for making UNIX so powerful. (Choose two.)
A. MIT
B. GNU
C. BSD
D. POSIX
E. BESYS
F. System V
Answer: C, F
Question: 15
You want to access data relevant to some running processes in the system. Which directory
contains the system information describing the system and processes (for example, PID files)
since the system was booted?
A. /sys
B. /srv
C. /proc
D. /var/run
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 5 of 64
E. /var/lock
Answer: D
Question: 16
Exhibit:
The root user at server1 has connected to server200 using ssh. While trying to execute remote
graphical applications he receives an error as shown in the Exhibit. What could be the possible
solution to get rid of this error and run remote graphical applications safely through ssh? (Choose
all that apply.)
A. Use the -X option with ssh while connecting.
B. Remove the ~/.Xauthority file on both server1 and server200.
C. Set the XAuthLocation parameter correctly in /etc/ssh/ssh_config.
D. Set the X11Forwarding parameter to yes in /etc/ssh/sshd_config.
Answer: A, D
Question: 17
Which command would help you identify and count how many lines have the letter "w" and the
letters (together) in the words.txt file?
A. grep 'w' 'is' words.txt | wc -l
B. grep w words.txt | grep is | wc -l
C. grep w words.txt | grep is | wc -c
D. grep '\.w' '\.is' words.txt | wc -l
Answer: B
Question: 18
Multiple users can share a UNIX machine. This is made possible by the OS by using one user's
idle time to service other users. What is this feature of an operating system identified as?
A. data sharing
B. time sharing
C. one-time initialization
D. light weight kernel threading
E. interrupt driven process handling
Answer: B
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 6 of 64
Question: 19
User scott issued the following command at the bash prompt:
[scott@station1 ~]$read -t15 -n10 -s DAX
What is the purpose of issuing this command?
A. to make the read statement provide 15 seconds to enter up to 10 characters silently (no echo
to terminal) into the $DAX variable
B. to make the read statement provide 15 seconds to enter a minimum of 10 characters echoing
onto the terminal
C. to make the read statement provide 15 seconds to enter a minimum of 10 characters without
echoing onto the terminal
D. to make the read statement provide 15 seconds to enter up to 10 characters, echoing onto to
terminal, into the $DAX variable
Answer: A
Question: 20
Match the following signal values with their description.
1. 9 a. Hangup
2 . 19 b. Terminate the process and dump core
3. 11 c. Kill signal
4. 1 d. Stop the process
A. 1-c, 2-b, 3-a,4-b
B. 1-c, 2-d, 3-b, 4-a
C. 1-d, 2-b, 3-c, 4-a
D. 1-d, 2-a, 3-c, 4-b
Answer: B
Question: 21
Note the command given below:
ls -l | grep hello\.gif
Which statement is true about this command?
A. It will long-list the file hello.gif.
B. It will return an error because an escape character \ is used.
C. It will long-list the files in the hello*gif format from the current working directory.
D. It will long-list the hello.gif, hello-gif files or any file in the hello? gif format.
Answer: D
Question: 22
Identify the two true statements about FTP servers. (Choose two.)
A. FTP servers typically listen on port 21.
B. FTP servers typically listen on port 20.
C. FTP servers send data to clients on port 21.
D. FTP servers send data to clients on port 20.
E. FTP servers do not provide anonymous login by default.
Answer: A, D
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 7 of 64
Question: 23
A new user smith wants to customize the bourne shell by creating a new alias for the ls -l
command. He wants to make the new alias persistent across logouts and also reboots. What
could be done to make the new alias persistent only for smith?
A. Add the new alias to ~/.bashrc.
B. Add the new alias to ~/.profile.
C. Add the new alias to /etc/profile.
D. Add the new alias to ~/bash_profile.
Answer: B
Question: 24
The user scott tries to create a directory hierarchy and encounters the
following error:
[scott@server1 tmp]$ mkdir test/test1/stored/all
mkdir: cannot create directory `test/test1/stored/all`: No such file or directory
[scott@server1 tmp]$pwd /tmp
Which two commands can the user scott use to create the directory hierarchy successfully?
(Choose two.)
A. mkdir /test/test1/stored/all
B. mkdir -p test/test1/stored/all
C. mkdir -r test/test1/stored/all
D. mkdirhier /test/test1/stored/all
E. mkdir -r /tmp/test/test1/stored/all
F. mkdirhier /tmp/test/test1/stored/all
Answer: B, F
Question: 25
Examine the following output:
[root@station1]ps -f
UID PID PPID C STIME TTY TIME CMD
root 3944 3820 1 03:32 tty1 01:57 -bash
root 3984 3944 0 03:32 tty1 01:57 ksh
root 3985 3984 0 03:32 tty1 01:57 ps -f
Which columns would you analyze to find the most recently invoked shell?
A. Analyze only the PID.
B. Analyze only the UID.
C. Analyze only the PPID.
D. Analyze both the UID and PID.
E. Analyze both the PID and PPID.
F. Analyze both the UID and PPID.
Answer: E
Question: 26
As root you have changed the default login shell to one of the shells listed in /etc/shells file.
Which file entry is modified as a result of this?
A. /etc/shadow
B. /etc/shells
C. /etc/passwd
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 8 of 64
D. /etc/default/useradd
Answer: C
Question: 27
Exhibit:
The shell script is executed using the default shell interpreter with the input as w. What will be the
output of the script based on this input?
A. It will print the current date and time.
B. It will list all the currently logged in users.
C. It will show that the input is not a valid option.
D. It will print the currently logged in users, current date, and time.
E. It will not show any result because the case block is terminated with an esac.
Answer: C
Question: 28
Which command gives the following output?
Date 03/12/2007, Time 12:00:01 AM
A. echo "Date date +%x , Time date +%r "
B. echo "Date `date +%x` , Time `date +%r` "
C. echo "Date `date +%r` , Time `date +%x` "
D. echo "Date `time +%x` , Time `time +%r` "
Answer: B
Question: 29
Which three statements are true about screen? (Choose three.)
A. screen has the ability to lock a terminal.
B. screen has the ability to monitor a session.
C. screen windows do not adhere to vt100 standards.
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 9 of 64
D. All windows in a screen are dependent on each other.
E. Each window in a screen has its own scroll-back buffer.
Answer: A, B, E
Question: 30
Which statements are true about the File Extensions? (Choose all that apply.)
A. File extensions are just part of the file name.
B. File extensions are cared by all applications.
C. File content depends upon the file extensions.
D. File extensions do not always say what the file is.
E. File extensions have no special meaning to the kernel.
Answer: A, D, E
Question: 31
As root user you have set the environment variable HISTIGNORE="ls:man:pwd:cat" with the
other history-related shell variables at their default. What impact does it have on shell history?
A. History will ignore only the commands listed in the HISTIGNORE variable.
B. History will save only the first occurrence of the commands listed in the HISTIGNORE variable.
C. History will ignore only the commands, issued with any valid switch, listed in the HISTIGNORE
variable.
D. History will save only the first occurrence of the commands, issued with any valid switch, listed
in the HISTIGNORE variable.
Answer: A
Question: 32
Exhibit:
The user smith needs to display the MAC address only of eth0. Which command gives the
desired output?
A. ifconfig eth0 | awk '/eth0/ {print $0}'
B. /sbin/ifconfig eth0 | awk '/HW/ {print $4}'
C. /sbin/ifconfig eth0 | awk '/HW/ {print $5}'
D. /sbin/ifconfig eth0 | awk '/eth0/ {print $4}'
Answer: C
Question: 33
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 10 of 64
View the Exhibit and note the permissions and ownerships of the /sysdir directory.
What could be done to let the user scott write to and copy files from the directory without listing
others files and without compromising the security of the directory?
A. Add rwx to others permissions of the /sysdir directory.
B. Add scott as a member of the admins group and set permissions to 700 on the /sysdir
directory.
C. Add scott as a member of the admins group and set the group permissions wx for the /sysdir
directory.
D. Add scott as a member of the admins group and set the group permissions rx for the /sysdir
directory.
Answer: C
Question: 34
The user smith has logged in to the system and his current working directory is /tmp. Which
command changes the user current working. Which command changes the user's current
working directory to the user's home directory? (Choose all that apply.)
A. cd
B. cd ..
C. cd ~
D. cd ../~
E. cd /home
F. cd $HOME
Answer: A, C, F
Question: 35
The user smith executes the following command:
awk -F: '/bash$/ {nlines++; print $1;} END {print "\n", nlines}' /etc/passwd.
What could be the purpose of using this command?
A. to print all lines in /etc/passwd that ends with bash
B. to print the name of all normal users in /etc/passwd
C. to print and count the names of the users who use the bash shell
D. to print the total number of lines in /etc/passwd that ends with bash
Answer: C
Question: 36
You want to customize the default background color in an X window system using command-line
options. What would you do to achieve this task?
A. Edit the ~/.xinitrc file.
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 11 of 64
B. Edit the ~/.Xdefaults file.
C. Edit the ~/.Xresources file.
D. Edit the ~/.Xauthority file.
Answer: B
Question: 37
A printer has been configured on a Linux box in a heterogeneous network using CUPS. A user
sends a print job from a WINDOWS machine. Identify the statement that holds true in this
scenario.
A. The user will not able to print because he/she is on a non-UNIX system.
B. The user will not able to print because the printer is configured using CUPS.
C. The user will be able to print because the printer follows the IPP standard.
D. The user will not be able to print because WINDOWS does not support CUPS by default.
Answer: C
Question: 38
smith is trying to send a message to the local user bob using the write
command and he receives an error as shown below:
[smith@station2 ~]$write bob
Write: bob has messages disabled
[smith@station2 ~]$
What could be done to overcome the error?
A. bob should set the logged in terminal to the tty group.
B. bob should enable talk and ntalk on his system.
C. bob should accept messages using the mesg y command.
D. smith should indicate the terminal on which bob is logged in.
Answer: C
Question: 39
User smith on station2 is trying to chat with the remote user bob on station1 using the talk
command. smith receives an error message as shown below:
[smith@station2 ~]$talk bob@station1.example.com
[No connection yet]
[ Error on read from talk daemon: Connection refused ]
[smith@station2 ~]$
What can the root user do to resolve the issue? (Choose two.)
A. let smith retry talk by reading from STDIN and sending to bob
B. let smith retry talk after changing the group of talk command to tty
C. let smith retry the talk request with UDP port 518 open on both systems
D. let smith retry talk after restarting the xinetd service with ntalk enabled on both systems
E. let smith retry talk after restarting the network service with the UDP port 517 blocked on both
systems
Answer: C, D
Question: 40
What are the improvements of vim over vi? (Choose all that apply.)
A. multi-level undo
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 12 of 64
B. online help system
C. command-line completion
D. multiple windows and buffers
E. supports using arrow keys in command mode
F. search and replace operations in command mode
Answer: A, B, C, D
Question: 41
Match the following file redirection operators with their functions:
1) < a) redirects STDOUT to a file (overwrite)
2) > b) redirects STDIN from a file
3) >> c) redirects both STDOUT and STDERR
4) 2> d) redirects STDOUT to a file (append)
5) 2>> e) redirects STDERR to a file (overwrite)
6) &> f) redirects STDERR to a file (append)
7) 2>&1 g) redirects both STDOUT and STDERR
A. 1-b, 2-a, 3-d, 4-e, 5-f, 6-c, 7-g
B. 1-b, 2-e, 3-f, 4-a, 5-d, 6-g, 7-c
C. 1-c, 2-e, 3-f, 4-a, 5-d, 6-b, 7-g
D. 1-c, 2-a, 3-d, 4-f, 5-e, 6-g, 7-b
E. 1-b, 2-a, 3-d, 4-f, 5-e, 6-c, 7-g
F. 1-b, 2-e, 3-d, 4-a, 5-f, 6-c, 7-g
Answer: A
Question: 42
The /data directory that belongs to the apps group is set with 1770 permissions. The details of the
apps group members are given below.
# groups smith bob scott
smith : smith apps
scott : scott apps
bob : bob apps
What are the effective permissions for each of these users on other users' files and directories in
the /data directory?
A. Read, write, and execute permissions on files and directories.
B. Read permission on files and read and execute permissions on directories.
C. Read and write permissions on files and read, write, and execute permissions on directories.
D. Read permissions only because full permission is set to the owner of the files and directories
only.
Answer: B
Question: 43
As root you have issued the following command :
[root@station2]# rpmbuild --rebuild sendmail-8.12.8-9.80.src.rpm
What does the rpmbuild command do? (Choose two.)
A. It builds the sendmail source package.
B. It only installs the binary software produced from the sendmail source package.
C. It only compiles the binary software produced from the sendmail source package.
D. It does both the compilation and installation of the binary software produced from the sendmail
source package.
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 13 of 64
Answer: A, D
Question: 44
You want to check any particular user is consuming a large amount of CPU. Which command
would you use to check the CPU used by a user?
A. w
B. who
C. free
D. users
E. finger
Answer: A
Question: 45
You have issued the following command:
mkdir -p test/a{dax,connor,bryan}g/vo{in,out,tmp}
Which of the following directories will it create? (Choose all that apply.)
A. test/voin/adaxg
B. test/adaxg/voout
C. test/aconnorg/voin
D. test/adaxnnorg/voinout
E. test/aconnoyang/vointmp
Answer: B, C
Question: 46
The root user on your system has issued the ln -s file1.txt file2.txt command. Which two
statements are true? (Choose two.)
A. file2.txt will have 777 permissions.
B. file1.txt will be symbolically linked to file2.txt.
C. file2.txt will be symbolically linked to file1.txt.
D. file2.txt and file1.txt will have the same inode number.
E. file2.txt and file1.txt should exist on the same file system.
Answer: A, C
Question: 47
View the Exhibit and note the directory hierarchy.
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 14 of 64
How would you delete the /test1 directory hierarchy? (Choose all that apply.)
A. rm -rf /test1
B. rmdir -r /test1
C. rmdir -p /test1
D. rm -d /test1/hello/fine/documents
E. rm -rf /test1/hello/fine/documents
F. rmdir -p /test1/hello/fine/documents
Answer: A, F
Question: 48
What would be the default permissions on files and directories created by a user with umask
027?
A. Files will have 640 permissions and directories will have 750 permissions.
B. Files will have 639 permissions and directories will have 750 permissions.
C. Files and directories will have 000 permissions because 027 is not a valid umask.
D. Files and directories will have default permissions as of the default umask because 027 is not
a valid umask.
E. Files will have 666 permissions and directories will have 777 permissions because 027 is not a
valid umask.
Answer: A
Question: 49
Observe the following while loop:
while true
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 15 of 64
do
echo " Welcome"
sleep 5
done
What does the while statement do in the script when the condition is true?
A. It executes the echo command 5 times with a sleep time of 5 minutes.
B. It executes the echo command infinitely with a sleep time of 5 minutes.
C. It executes the echo command 5 times with a sleep time of 5 seconds.
D. It executes the echo command infinitely with a sleep time of 5 seconds.
Answer: D
Question: 50
Which command is used for compilation when installing software from the source code?
A. make
B. install
C. ./configure
D. make install
Answer: A
Question: 51
The user smith has issued the command:
cut -f1,3 -d: /etc/passwd | tr a-z A-Z > file1.txt
What could be the purpose of using this command?
A. to map the username, UID, GID on the system in uppercase to file1.txt
B. to map the username along with UIDs on the system in uppercase to file1.txt
C. to map the username, UID, passwords on the system in lowercase to file1.txt
D. to map the username along with passwords on the system in uppercase to file1.txt
Answer: B
Question: 52
What is the minimum number of disk partitions required to have a successful Linux installation?
A. 2 (two)
B. 4 (four)
C. 1 (one)
D. 3 (three)
Answer: C
Question: 53
Which statements are true about a process? ( Choose all that apply.)
A. It is associated with a nice value.
B. It is associated with a Process ID (PID).
C. It does not inherit the environment from the parent process that spawns it.
D. It uses only RAM irrespective of the amount of memory available in the system.
E. Each process will normally be associated with the UID and GID of the user that launched the
program.
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 16 of 64
Answer: A, B, E
Question: 54
Identify the program that runs with the real and effective UID and GID of the switched user when
you switch from one user to another using su command.
A. a logout script
B. the id command
C. an interactive shell
D. the login command
E. the chroot command
Answer: C
Question: 55
You are planning to add the new printer1 print queue and also want to make it the default print
queue. Which of the following two commands would help you achieve the task? (Choose two.)
A. lpadmin -d printer1.
B. lpadmin -x printer1.
C. lpadmin -p printer1 -E parallel:/dev/lp0.
D. lpadmin -p printer1 -E -v parallel:/dev/lp0.
Answer: A, D
Question: 56
Match the following Linux kernel virtual hierarchies with their content:
1) /proc a) Per process information directories and other tunables
2) /sys b) RAM drive for POSIX shared memory operations
3) /dev/pts c) Kernel object data structures
4) /dev/shm d) Auto-ownership of terminals (ttys)
A. 1-a, 2-c, 3-d, 4-b
B. 1-b, 2-a, 3-d, 4-c
C. 1-a, 2-b, 3-d, 4-c
D. 1-b, 2-a, 3-c, 4-d
Answer: A
Question: 57
What would be the output of the nested for loop given below?
for (( i=1; i<=5; i++))
do
for (( j=1; j<=5; j++))
do
echo -n "$i"
done
echo ####
done
A. 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 17 of 64
B. 1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
1 2 3 4 5
C. 5 4 3 2 1
5 4 3 2 1
5 4 3 2 1
5 4 3 2 1
5 4 3 2 1
D. 5 5 5 5 5
4 4 4 4 4
3 3 3 3 3
2 2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1 1
Answer: A
Question: 58
Which statement is true about a normal user created with UID less than 500?
A. The user will not have an interactive login shell.
B. The user will have the privilege to mount and unmount file systems.
C. The user account can be used only for system service-related tasks.
D. The user will have all normal user features like home directory, shell, and so on, by default.
E. The user will be restricted from logging in to the system because the UID < 500 is reserved for
system users or pseudo accounts.
Answer: D
Question: 59
You want to archive a directory and its subdirectories (excluding a list of subdirectories from a
file) using the tar command. Which option would help you to do this?
A. -F
B. -X
C. -C
D. --exclude
Answer: B
Question: 60
Exhibit:
What is the output of the shell script when executed at the bash shell?
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 18 of 64
A. 1
22
333
4444
B. 1
12
123
1234
C. 4444
333
22
1
D. 1234
123
12
1
Answer: A
Question: 61
As a root user you execute the commands as shown below:
[root@station1]# a=$((10 % 4 + 6 * 2))
[root@station1]# echo $a
What would be the output of the echo statement?
A. 2
B. 12
C. 14
D. 10
Answer: C
Question: 62
You executed the following command to verify the integrity of sendmail:
[root@station1 ~]# rpm -Va sendmail
.......T. c /etc/mail/sendmail.cf
S.5....T. c /var/log/mail/statistics
[root@station1 ~]#
What do infer about the /var/log/mail/statistics file from the output?
A. The permissions, user ownership, and file type have changed.
B. The permissions, group ownership and file type have changed.
C. The user ownership, group ownership and file type have changed.
D. The MD5 signature, file size, and modification time have changed.
Answer: D
Question: 63
You have the copy of all the rpms in the /RPMS directory on your local Linux machine. After
logging in as root and changing to the /RPMS directory, you try to install the mysql package using
the rpm command. You end up with an error message as shown below:
Error: Failed dependencies: Perl(DBI) is needed by mysql.
How would you overcome this error and install mysql successfully by resolving the
dependencies?
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 19 of 64
A. by installing the software using rpm with the -F option
B. by installing the software using rpm with the --aid option
C. by installing the software using rpm with the --force option
D. by installing the software using rpm with the --nodeps option
Answer: B
Question: 64
Exhibit:
As bob you have logged in at the tty1 terminal and run the commands as shown in the Exhibit.
You want to list the background jobs in the current terminal and issue the jobs command. Which
statement is true in this context?
A. The plus sign indicates the previous job.
B. The plus sign indicates the last stopped job.
C. Only the job with a minus sign can be made to run in the foreground again.
D. Only the job with a plus sign can be made to run in the foreground again.
Answer: B
Question: 65
You have opened three terminals and the Firefox browser at Graphical User Interface (GUI). How
can you ensure that the same applications and windows start on your next login to GUI?
A. While logging out, save the settings in the ~/.Xresources file.
B. While logging out, use the hot key, [Control] + [Alt] + [Backspace].
C. While logging out, use the kill command with signal 12 to kill gdm-binary.
D. While logging out by selection, log out from the action menu. Click the save current setup
option.
Answer: D
Question: 66
The user smith, whose primary group is smith, would like to create a file in his home directory,
which belongs to the group apps. Which two statements are correct? (Choose two.)
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 20 of 64
A. SGID should be set on the destination directory to let users create files that belong to the
group other than their primary group.
B. The user smith could create a file that belongs to the apps group only if his private group is the
apps group as per /etc/group.
C. The user smith could use the newgrp command to log in to the apps group and his private
group will be changed to apps group for a particular session if his name is listed in /etc/group
as a member of apps group.
D. The user smith could use the newgrp command to log in to the apps group, but a password is
required to change his private group to apps group for a particular session if his name is not
listed in /etc/group as a member of apps group.
Answer: C, D
Question: 67
Which system help facility gives the help page exactly as using -k switch with man?
A. info
B. whatis
C. apropos
D. --help option with the command
Answer: C
Question: 68
Where do the manual (man) pages for all commands reside in the File System Hierarchy (FSH)?
A. /usr/share/man
B. /usr/share/info/man
C. /usr/man/share/locale
D. /usr/share/locale/man
Answer: A
Question: 69
Match the mpage options with their functionalities.
1. mpage -r a. toggle printing on both sides of the paper (duplex mode)
2. mpage -t b. print in landscape mode instead of the default portrait
3. mpage -l c. reverse the order in which the pages are printed
A. 1-c, 2-a, 3-b
B. 1-b, 2-c, 3-a
C. 1-c, 2-b, 3-a
D. 1-b, 2-a, 3-c
Answer: A
Question: 70
What are the extra features that the Bourne Again Shell (bash) has compared to the Bourne Shell
(sh)? (Choose all that apply.)
A. background exit status
B. read values from the terminal
C. combine STDOUT and STDERR
D. file name completion and command history
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 21 of 64
E. allows functions and variables with the same name
F. expansion of positional parameters beyond $9 with ${num}
Answer: D, E, F
Question: 71
Match the following arguments with their actions when used with the find command:
1) -print a) Allows a command to be run against each matching file
2) -ls b) Is the default action and displays matches
3) -exec c) Displays full details on matches
4) -ok d) Can be used when you want a confirmation prompt
A. 1-b, 2-c, 3-a, 4-d
B. 1-b, 2-a, 3-d, 4-c
C. 1-c, 2-a, 3-b, 4-d
D. 1-c, 2-d, 3-a, 4-b
Answer: A
Question: 72
Which statement is true about the privileges granted to a user with the UID of 0?
A. The system ignores privileges to modify software installed on the system.
B. Privileges are granted as per the permissions set on every file and device known to the
system.
C. Privileges are granted only to read most of the configuration files and documentation files in
the system directories, not modify them.
D. The system ignores all permissions when responding to commands from the user and
provides read and write permissions to every file and device known to the system.
Answer: D
Question: 73
Exhibit:
As the user bob, you list all the background jobs using the jobs command. You want to bring the
last job stopped into the foreground. Which three commands would you use to achieve this task?
(Choose three.)
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 22 of 64
A. fg
B. %2
C. %3
D. %1
E. fg 2
F. fg 3
G. fg 1
Answer: A, C, F
Question: 74
Why is a Linux operating system always developed and released under a common standard
known as Linux Standard Base (LSB)?
A. to avoid interoperability
B. to avoid POSIX Compliance
C. to ensure application-level diversity
D. to ensure compatibility among distributions
Answer: D
Question: 75
Match the following Regular Expression Character classes with their class descriptions:
1) [:alnum:] a) match all control characters
2) [:alpha:] b) match all printable characters (not including space)
3) [:graph:] c) match all letters and digits
4) [:print:] d) match all letters
5) [:cntrl:] e) match all printable characters
A. 1-d, 2-c, 3-b, 4-e, 5-a
B. 1-c, 2-d, 3-e, 4-a, 5-b
C. 1-d, 2-c, 3-e, 4-b, 5-a
D. 1-c, 2-d, 3-b, 4-e, 5-a
Answer: D
Question: 76
As user smith you want the CPU utilization of all the users logged on to server1 server. You want
the information available automatically as soon as you login to the bash login shell and want the
information available only to smith. What would you do on server1, which has all the default shell
configuration files, to accomplish the task?
A. Add the w command to ~/.profile file.
B. Add the who command to ~/.profile file.
C. Add the w command to ~/.bash_profile file.
D. Add the who command to ~/.bash_profile file.
Answer: C
Question: 77
A normal user bob wants to get into the graphical mode and executes the startx command.
Identify the statement that holds true in this context.
A. The system switches to run level 5.
B. The user is taken into the graphical mode without being prompted for a password.
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 23 of 64
C. The user is taken into the graphical mode and the system prompts for a password to log in.
D. The user is taken into the graphical mode and the system continues in the old run level and
prompts for a password for the user to log in.
Answer: B
Question: 78
You have executed the following command as root user:
find /home | cpio -o -H tar -F root@stationX:/dev/nst0 --rsh-command=/usr/bin/ssh
What could be the purpose of issuing this command?
A. to archive the contents of the /home directory to the remote machine's tape drive
B. to archive the contents of the /home directory in tar format to a remote machine's tape drive
C. to archive the contents of the /home directory in cpio format to a remote machine's tape drive
D. to archive the contents of the /home directory in cpio and tar format to a remote machine's
tape drive
Answer: B
Question: 79
As a Linux system administrator you want to check and print the names of the users having UID >
500, and are not using the bash or csh shell. Which two commands would help you to do so?
(Choose two.)
A. awk -F: '/([^(bash|csh)])$/ {if ($3 >500) print $1}' /etc/passwd
B. awk -F: '/([(bash)]|[(csh)])$/ {if ($3 >500) print $1}' /etc/passwd
C. awk -F: '/([^(bash)]|[^(csh)])$/ {if ($3 >500) print $1}' /etc/passwd
D. awk -F: '/([^(nologin)]|[^(ksh)])$/ {if ($3 >500)print$2}' /etc/passwd
Answer: A, C
Question: 80
You execute the following two commands at the bash prompt in the same order as shown below:
[root@station2]# myexpr=$((14*18))
[root@station2]# echo $((56+$myexpr))
What would be the output of the echo command?
A. 56
B. 308
C. 252
D. $myexpr
E. $((56+$myexpr))
Answer: B
Question: 81
Match the following Regular Expression Quantifiers with their appropriate values:
1) * a) match 0 or 1 times
2) + b) match exactly n times
3) ? c) match at least n times
4) {n} d) match 0 or more times
5) {n,} e) match 1 or more times
A. 1-e, 2-d, 3-a, 4-c, 5-b
B. 1-d, 2-e, 3-a, 4-b, 5-c
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 24 of 64
C. 1-a, 2-e, 3-d, 4-c, 5-b
D. 1-d, 2-a, 3-e, 4-b, 5-c
Answer: B
Question: 82
As user smith you want to log in to a remote machine in a securely encrypted channel. Which
utility would you use for the purpose?
A. ssh
B. ftp
C. telnet
D. rlogin
Answer: A
Question: 83
The user smith issued the PS1='[\w \d \! \#]'command. What is the purpose of using this
command?
A. to display the date, history number, and a "#" at his shell prompt
B. to display the week day, date, history number, and”#" at his shell prompt
C. to display the command number, date and "#" at his shell prompt along with the working
directory
D. to display the command number and history number of the command, date, and current
working directory at his shell prompt
Answer: D
Question: 84
What would be the output of the nested for loop given below?
for (( i=1; i<=5; i++ ))
do
for (( j=1; j<=i; j++ ))
do
echo -n "$j"
done
echo " "
done
A. 1
12
123
1234
12345
B. 12345
1234
123
12
1
C. 12345
12345
12345
12345
12345
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 25 of 64
D. 12345
1234
123
1234
12345
Answer: A
Question: 85
Match the following variables available to the user that are set internally by the shell, with their
descriptions:
1) $1 - $9 a) process ID of the shell
2) $* b) the string containing all the arguments to the shell
3) $? c) process ID of the last command run in the background
4) $$ d) positional parameters
5) $! e) exit status of the most recently executed command
A. 1-d, 2-a, 3-e, 4-b, 5-c
B. 1-d, 2-c, 3-a, 4-b, 5-e
C. 1-d, 2-b, 3-e, 4-a, 5-c
D. 1-d, 2-a, 3-c, 4-b, 5-e
Answer: C
Question: 86
Identify the feature that is common to both the GNOME and KDE desktops.
A. Both are themeable.
B. built on the Qt library
C. built on the GTK library
D. Both are created by FSF.
E. Both use metacity as the default window manager.
Answer: A
Question: 87
You have created the user smith on your Linux machine. What is the default location of smith's
mail spool on the machine?
A. ~smith/mbox.
B. /var/mail/spool/smith.
C. /var/spool/smith/mail.
D. /var/mail/smith/spool.
E. /var/spool/mail/smith.
Answer: E
Question: 88
A printer has been connected to the single available port. You execute the following command at
the prompt:
echo "This is a simple test" > /dev/lp0
What can you infer from the command?
A. The text is saved in the /dev/lp0 file.
B. The text is simply echoed on to the standard output device.
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 26 of 64
C. The text will be printed by the printer attached to/dev/lp0.
D. The text will not be printed because the printer has not been mentioned explicitly on the
command line.
Answer: C
Question: 89
The user smith on server1 wants to check the IP address of the machine along with the MAC
address.
View the Exhibit that shows the error message received by smith during this.
Which statement is true in this scenario?
A. He can view the IP address and the MAC address by executing the ip addr command.
B. He cannot execute the command which resides in /sbin where system binaries for root user
reside.
C. He cannot view the IP address and MAC address of the machine because only root user can
list network interfaces.
D. He can view the IP address and the MAC address by giving the absolute path of the command
as /sbin/ifconfig.
Answer: D
Question: 90
The user scott issues the cp -f ~/file1 /tmp/dir2 command. Which of these statements are true
about this command? (Choose all that apply.)
A. The /root/file1 file is copied to the /tmp/dir2 directory.
B. If /tmp/dir2 exists and is a file, it will be overwritten by file1.
C. The file1 file is copied from scott's home directory to /tmp/dir2.
D. If /tmp/dir2 does not exist, ~/file1 will be copied as /tmp/file1.
Answer: B, C
Question: 91
The user smith issued the egrep "^[[:upper:]]" words.txt command. What does this command do?
A. displays all lines in the words.txt file that contains an uppercase letter
B. displays all lines in the words.txt file that begins with an uppercase letter
C. displays all lines in the words.txt file after translating uppercase letters to lowercase
D. displays all lines in the words.txt file after translating lowercase letters to uppercase
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 27 of 64
Answer: B
Question: 92
You have downloaded a DOS-formatted text file through anonymous ftp using binary transfer
mode to your Linux machine. What impact does this have on the downloaded text file?
A. The text file is stripped off the carriage return.
B. The text file is stripped off the line feed character.
C. The text file gets corrupted because of incompatibility in the format.
D. The text file does not undergo any processing because of the binary transfer mode.
Answer: D
Question: 93
Your system is running in text-based mode. During the next reboot, you want it to directly boot
into the graphical mode. How would you achieve this task?
A. Edit the configuration file /etc/inittab and change the default run level to 5.
B. Edit the configuration file /etc/inittab and change the default run level to 3.
C. Edit the configuration file /etc/inittab and change the default run level to 1.
D. Edit the configuration file /etc/inittab and change the default run level to 6.
Answer: A
Question: 94
The user bob on station1 wants to chat using talk with smith on station2 in the same network.
Identify the statement that holds true in this scenario.
A. smith has to respond to bob only from station2.
B. smith can respond to bob from any machine within the network.
C. bob can use only the login name to send a message to smith using talk.
D. bob can use talk to chat with only the locally logged-in users on station1.
Answer: B
Question: 95
Which commands, without any options, could help a user to read the entire contents of a text file
in his or her home directory? (Choose two.)
A. xxd
B. less
C. grep
D. head
E. more
F. strings
Answer: B, E
Question: 96
You have opened a file called newfile.txt in the vi editor and in command mode, you enter :0,$
s/hello/init/g. What could be the purpose of issuing this command?
A. to replace the word hello with the word init globally in the newfile.txt file
B. to replace the word init with the word hello globally in the newfile.txt file
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 28 of 64
C. to delete all the lines containing the word hello and init in the newfile.txt file
D. to replace the word hello with the word init from the cursor position in the newfile.txt file
Answer: A
Question: 97
The /projects directory is being shared by server1 with the share name datashare through samba.
To access the shared directory as bob you issue the following command:
smbclient //server1/datashare -U 'bob%foouser'
What happens when you execute the command?
A. All the samba shares on server1 will be displayed.
B. bob will be prompted for a password to access the share.
C. All the shares on server1 accessible to bob will be displayed.
D. The share will be accessed with the credentials of bob without being prompted for a password.
Answer: D
Question: 98
Which two statements are true about Regular Expressions? (Choose two.)
A. They are build upon expressions that match multiple characters.
B. They can be used only by commands, not programming languages.
C. They help most characters, letters, and numbers match themselves.
D. They supports "<" and ">" at the beginning and end of sentences only.
E. They accept text patterns from STDIN, from a network connection or from a user supplied
input.
Answer: C, E
Question: 99
Which statements are true about a source RPM? (Choose all that apply.)
A. Source RPM cannot be used to build a binary rpm.
B. Source RPMs can be compiled and installed directly.
C. Source RPMs allow to customize the package for a particular CPU.
D. Source RPM does not contain information about how to install the software.
Answer: B, C
Question: 100
You want a script to be automatically run for the default graphical desktop as soon as you log in.
What would you do to achieve this task?
A. Go to Applications > System Tools > Task Scheduler and add the absolute path of the script.
B. Go to Applications > System Settings > Add/Remove Applications and add the absolute path
of the script.
C. Go to Applications > Preferences >More Preferences->Preferred Applications and add the
absolute path of the script.
D. Go to Applications > Preferences > More Preferences > Sessions and add the absolute path of
the script in Startup programs.
Answer: D
Question: 101
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 29 of 64
You have logged in as the root user into run level 3. What happens if you execute the xinit
command?
A. The system changes to runlevel 5.
B. The system changes to runlevel 4.
C. The system continues to run in runlevel 3.
D. The system changes to runlevel 1 (single).
Answer: C
Question: 102
Identify the shareable directories according to File system Hierarchy Standard (FHS). (Choose all
that apply.)
A. /etc
B. /usr
C. /var/run
D. /var/lock
E. /var/mail
F. /etc/sysconfig
Answer: B, E
Question: 103
Exhibit:
Identify the files that are hard linked to each other, from the Exhibit.
A. a.txt and b.txt
B. b.txt and newfile
C. file1.txt and file2.txt
D. file1.txt and config.txt
E. a.txt ,b.txt and newfile
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 30 of 64
Answer: A
Question: 104
You have a file named newbackup on the server1.example.com server. To download the file
through lftp as user bob, you issued the following command:
[bob@station2 ~]$ lftp ftp.server1.example.com/pub/> get newbackup & After a while, before the
download is completed, you quit lftp. Which statement about lftp holds true in this context?
A. It will continue to run in the background but stops downloading the file.
B. It ignores th quit signal and continues the download until it completes it.
C. It will continue to run in the background until the entire file has been downloaded.
D. It will run as a foreground process until the file is downloaded completely and then quits.
Answer: C
Question: 105
You have issued the following command:
echo -e "Welcome\nTo Oracle\nEnterprise\rLinux"
Why would you use the -e switch? (Choose two.)
A. to redirect the output to the standard output device
B. to remove the normal newline character from the end of the output
C. to cause echo to honor the escape sequence for the carriage return
D. to cause echo to honor the escape sequence for both the newline characters
Answer: C, D
Question: 106
Which two statements are true about the init process? (Choose two.)
A. Process ID (PID) of init is always 0.
B. The first process spawned by the kernel is init.
C. init uses the exec() method to spawn a new process.
D. init reads the /etc/inittab file to load the default run level.
Answer: B, D
Question: 107
Which statements are true about xauth? (Choose all that apply.)
A. It stores all tokens in a file on the system.
B. It must be available to use X11 forwarding.
C. It distributes token on a host-by-host basis.
D. It can be used to control token-based access control.
E. It is not possible to install just xauth without installing the entire X server.
Answer: A, B, D
Question: 108
You executed the following command on a Linux machine:
sed s/hello/fun/g file1.txt | tr A-z -Z> file2.txt
What three things would this command do? (Choose three.)
A. Save all changes to file2.txt.
B. Translate all uppercase characters to lowercase.
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 31 of 64
C. Translate all lowercase characters to uppercase.
D. Modifies file1.txt and creates file2.txt.
E. Replace all occurrences of the entry hello with the entry fun.
F. Replace all occurrences of the entry fun with the entry hello.
Answer: A, C, E
Question: 109
You have the ps program and several child processes running in the tty1 terminal. What signal
will the child processes receive if the tty1 terminal is killed?
A. HUP
B. SIGINT
C. SIGSTOP
D. SIGTERM
Answer: A
Question: 110
You have logged in to your Linux box as a normal user with the default desktop. After working for
a while, you plan to change your desktop to KDE. How would you change the desktop?
A. by configuring the /etc/X11/prefdm file
B. by configuring the /etc/X11/xorg.conf file
C. by configuring the /etc/sysconfig/desktop file
D. by using the switchdesk command with KDE as the argument
Answer: D
Question: 111
You have logged in at the tty1 terminal on your local machine and want to display all the child
processes that have an associated terminal. Which command would help you achieve this task?
A. ps
B. ps a
C. ps -e
D. ps -a
Answer: D
Question: 112
Which statements are correct about a command shell? (Choose all that apply.)
A. It initializes synchronous interrupts.
B. It enables task automation using scripts.
C. It handles all communications with devices attached to the system.
D. It handles interaction between the user and the kernel when a user is operating at the
command line.
Answer: B, D
Question: 113
You have executed the following command:
find . -name "prg.conf" -exec chmod o+r '{}' \;
What is the expected output of this command?
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 32 of 64
A. Locate all the files named prg.conf in the current working directory and add execute
permissions for others on them.
B. Locate all the files named prg.conf only in the current working directory and process them by
using the chmod o+r command.
C. Locate all the files named prg.conf in the current working directory and its subdirectories and
add read permission for others.
D. Locate all the files named prg.conf in the current working directory and subdirectories and add
execute permissions for others on them.
Answer: C
Question: 114
While using the vi editor in command mode, which key sequences will delete six words? (Choose
all that apply.)
A. d6w
B. 6dw
C. dw6
D. wd6
E. 6dd
Answer: A, B
Question: 115
Exhibit:
What are the privileges granted to the user smith on the /tmp/backup directory?
A. He can only list the contents of /tmp/backup.
B. He can only navigate to the /tmp/backup directory.
C. He can change to and copy contents from the /tmp/backup directory.
D. He can only change to and from the /tmp/backup directory but cannot list its contents.
Answer: A
Question: 116
As a normal user on a Linux system, you are trying to execute the /bin/ls command. What
happens when you execute the command at the shell prompt?
A. The shell executes the program, sets a priority value of -19, and waits for the system calls from
the kernel.
B. The shell passes asynchronous interrupts to the kernel and returns to the prompt waiting to
display the output.
C. The shell executes the program, breaks memory into small chunks called pages, and initializes
a system call to the kernel.
D. The shell makes a system call asking the kernel to start the command as a child process and
goes to sleep, waits for the command to finish.
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 33 of 64
Answer: D
Question: 117
Match the following utilities with their functionalities.
1. ghostscript a. converts text to Postscript
2. enscript b. formats output to print several document pages on one printer page
3. mpage c. Postscript renderer that can convert between Postscript and many other formats
A. 1-a, 2-c, 3-b
B. 1-a, 2-b, 3-c
C. 1-c, 2-a, 3-b
D. 1-c, 2-b, 3-a
Answer: C
Question: 118
Exhibit:
Which option with the mkdir command would print a message for each created directory as
shown in the Exhibit?
A. The option m alone
B. The options m and p
C. The options p and v
D. The options m and v
Answer: C
Question: 119
You are writing a script and add the following line at the beginning of the script:
#!/bin/bash
What implications does this have on the shell script if the script is called directly at the c shell
prompt?
A. The script will treat the line as a comment.
B. The current shell will attempt to parse and execute the script.
C. The script will be executed using bash as the shell interpreter.
D. The script will be executed using bourne as the shell interpreter.
Answer: C
Question: 120
Exhibit:
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 34 of 64
The root user issued the following command on mailqueue.txt shown in the Exhibit:
cat mailqueue.txt | cut -dr -f2- | cut -f2 | cut -d "@" -f2 | sort | uniq | wc -l
What is the purpose of using this command?
A. to count the total number of e-mail addresses in the file
B. to list the e-mail addresses after removing the duplicates
C. to sort the e-mail addresses in mailqueue.txt and print it along with the total number of lines
D. to determine how many different domains are available amongst the e-mail addresses in
mailqueue.txt
Answer: D
Question: 121
Exhibit:
The users smith, scott, and bob are working on a common project and the /projects directory is
assigned to them as the common working directory to access using group privileges. The users
report a problem that they are assigned the ownership of whatever files they edit inside the
/projects directory. They also need to have the same level of access control on all files and
directories inside the /projects directory owned by other members of the group. As a Linux
administrator, what would you do to resolve this error and meet the users' requirements?
A. Set SUID alone on the /projects directory.
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 35 of 64
B. Set SGID alone on the /projects directory.
C. Set Sticky bit alone on the /projects directory.
D. Set 2770 permissions on the /projects directory.
E. Set 7777 permissions on the /projects directory.
F. Set 3770 permissions on the /projects directory.
Answer: F
Question: 122
Which three statements are true about tunneling an application through ssh? (Choose three.)
A. Tunneling works by port forwarding.
B. Only one port could be forwarded at a time
C. Tunneling works only if the remote host runs an X server.
D. Tunneling works only if the remote host runs an ssh server.
E. All requests aimed at the local port are forwarded to the remote port via ssh and thus
encrypted.
Answer: A, D, E
Question: 123
As root you execute the following command:
echo "Good\nMorning\nSmith"
You find the two newline characters in the output and do not want them to appear in the output.
Which two among the following would help you achieve this task without effecting the content of
echo command? (Choose two.)
A. echo -e "Good\nMorning\nSmith"
B. echo -n "Good\nMorning\nSmith"
C. echo -E "Good\nMorning\nSmith"
D. echo -ne "Good\nMorning\nSmith"
E. echo -nE "Good\nMorning\nSmith"
F. echo -eE "Good\nMorning\nSmith"
Answer: A, D
Question: 124
Match the print commands with their functionalities.
1. lpq a. printer control program
2. lprm b. Send a job to the queue to be printed.
3. lpr c. Remove a job from the queue.
4. lpc d. View the contents of the queue.
A. 1-a, 2-c, 3-b, 4-d
B. 1-a, 2-b, 3-c, 4-d
C. 1-d, 2-b, 3-c, 4-a
D. 1-d, 2-c, 3-b, 4-a
Answer: D
Question: 125
Match the following rpm options with their functions:
1. -i a. replaces any older versions of a package with the new package
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 36 of 64
2. -U b. upgrades packages, but only if an earlier version exists on your system
3. -F c. uninstalls the specified package
4. -e d. installs a new package
A. 1-d, 2-a, 3-b, 4-c
B. 1-d, 2-b, 3-a, 4-c
C. 1-a, 2-c, 3-b, 4-d
D. 1-a, 2-b, 3-c, 4-d
Answer: A
Question: 126
A normal user sends a print job to the default printer but later finds the print queue is big and
decides to cancel the job. What would the user do to perform this task?
A. The user has no permission to view job numbers using the jobs command and hence cannot
delete the job.
B. The user can know the job number but cannot remove the job as he has no permission to use
the lprm command.
C. The user has to list the job using lpq and remove it using the command lprm with the job
number as the argument.
D. The user has no permission to view job numbers using the lpq command and hence cannot
delete the job.
Answer: C
Question: 127
The Linux file system contains a directory by default on which all users have rwx permissions.
Only the root user has the permission to delete any file created by any user. Identify the directory
and find out why it is so.
A. /tmp, because sticky bit is set on that
B. / (root file system), because of 1777 permissions
C. /home, because home directories will have 770 permissions
D. /usr, because all users will have rwx permissions and sticky bit set on that
E. /home, because no user will have write permission on files owned by others
Answer: A
Question: 128
You use the SUSPEND character to suspend an already running process. Which signal does it
send to the process?
A. SIGINT
B. SIGHUP
C. SIGSTOP
D. SIGTERM
Answer: C
Question: 129
The free command reports slightly less memory than the actual total memory available. Why is it
so?
A. The swap space occupies a portion of the main memory that can never be freed.
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 37 of 64
B. The multiple instances of a program like shell, being run, consumes a portion of the main
memory that cannot be freed.
C. The kernel remains in the main memory while the computer is in operation and the memory it
occupies can never be freed.
D. The zombie processes that exist in the process table occupy a slightly less portion of the main
memory that can only be freed on reboot.
Answer: C
Question: 130
As smith you have logged in to the system at the tty1 terminal and issued the following command
to make the top command run in the background.
[smith@station2 ~]$ top&
You exit from the terminal and log back again in to the system at the same terminal. How is the
background job affected?
A. The background job will not be affected.
B. The background job gets into the foreground as soon as smith logs in to the system.
C. The background job is deleted from the job pool and does not get listed using the jobs
command.
D. The background job starts running in the background again as soon as smith logs in to the
system.
Answer: C
Question: 131
As the root user, you try to log in to station1 from station2 using ssh but fail with an error
message as shown below:
[root@station2]# ssh station1
root@station1's password :
Permission denied, please try again.
root@station1's password :
Permission denied, please try again.
root@station1's password :
Permission denied, (publickey,gssapi-with-mic, password).
[root@station2]#
What could be the possible reason for the error?
A. The sshd service is not running on station2.
B. The sshd service is not running on station1.
C. SSH on station1 is configured to deny root permission.
D. SSH on station2 is configured to deny root permission.
Answer: C
Question: 132
Exhibit:
What would be the output of the script if it is executed using the default shell interpreter?
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 38 of 64
A. Welcome 5 times
Welcome 4 times
Welcome 3 times
Welcome 2 times
Welcome 1 times
Welcome 0 times
B. Welcome 0 times
Welcome 1 times
Welcome 2 times
Welcome 3 times
Welcome 4 times
Welcome 5 times
C. Welcome 1 times
Welcome 2 times
Welcome 3 times
Welcome 4 times
D. Welcome $i times
Answer: B
Question: 133
Exhibit:
You have logged in as bob at the tty1 terminal and want to bring the job with the job number 1 to
the foreground. An error is reported when you execute the %man command to achieve this. What
could be the possible reason for the error?
A. There is no such job with the specified job name.
B. There is more than one job with the same job name.
C. The syntax to bring a background job to the foreground is incorrect.
D. bob does not have the permissions to bring the job from the background to the foreground.
Answer: B
Question: 134
How does the file command report the type of file? (Choose all that apply.)
A. By examining the file contents
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 39 of 64
B. By examining md5 checksum
C. By examining the file extensions
D. By comparing the file extensions with a local database available on the system
E. By examining magic numbers that occur at specific offsets and matching them against known
file types
Answer: A, E
Question: 135
Exhibit:
You have created a user account bob on a Linux machine and, when the user logs in, he has a
broken shell as shown in the Exhibit. As a Linux administrator, what would you do in this situation
to let user bob get rid of this error without compromising his privacy?
A. Change the permissions of /home/bob recursively to 777.
B. Change the permission of /home/bob/.bash_profile to 770.
C. Change the user bob's shell to /bin/bash by editing /etc/passwd.
D. Change the user and group ownership of /home/bob recursively to bob.
Answer: D
Question: 136
Which statement is true about the files and directories created inside the /project directory that
have 2777 permissions?
A. All files and directories will have the same group as that of the /project directory.
B. All files inside the /project directory will have permissions set to 2644 and the subdirectories
will have them set to 2755.
C. All files and directories will have the default group set to the primary group of the user who
creates them in /project directory.
D. All executables inside the /project directory will run with the effective group ID (EGID) of the
group of the /project directory.
Answer: A
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 40 of 64
Question: 137
Observe the following NFS share exported by server1.
[root@server1 ~]$ cat /etc/exports
/data .example.com(ro,root_squash)
You have logged in as root on station1 and try to access the /data NFS share on server1 as root.
Which statement holds true in this context?
A. The access to NFS share will be denied.
B. The NFS share will be accessed with the privileges of nobody.
C. The NFS share will be accessed with the privileges of the root user.
D. The NFS share will be accessed with the privileges of nfsnobody.
Answer: D
Question: 138
Identify the two true statements about screen. (Choose two.)
A. Terminal manager controls each session in a screen.
B. screen windows do not adhere to vt100 standards.
C. All windows in a screen are dependent on each other.
D. Each window in a screen has its own scroll-back buffer.
E. screen allows only one program to run using one terminal.
Answer: A, D
Question: 139
Match the bash file with its description:
File name Description
1. .bash_history a. a list of commands to be executed when you log in
2. .bash_logout b. contains a list of commands that is executed every time you open a new shell
3. .bash_profile c. keeps a list of the commands you have been typing
4. .bashrc d. a list of auto run commands to be executed when you leave the shell
A. 1-c, 2-d, 3-b, 4-a
B. 1-b, 2-c, 3-a, 4-d
C. 1-c, 2-d, 3-a, 4-b
D. 1-b, 2-c, 3-d, 4-a
Answer: C
Question: 140
You have received an email with a file login_remote, which is the HEX dump of a file. View the
Exhibit that shows a portion of this file.
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 41 of 64
How would you revert it to the original form in the name login?
A. By using the cat command with the -t option
B. By using the xxd command with the -r option
C. By using the strings command with the -t option
D. By using the strings command with the -a option
Answer: B
Question: 141
Which two statements are true about the su command? (Choose two.)
A. Switching from super user to super user requires a password.
B. Switching from super user to normal user requires a password.
C. Switching from normal user to super user requires a password.
D. Switching from super user to normal user does not require a password.
E. Switching from normal user to normal user does not require a password.
Answer: C, D
Question: 142
The user smith is asked to replace all occurrences of the letter "e" with the letter "y" in file1.txt
and save the output to fix.txt. Which command would let the user smith do so? (Choose all that
apply.)
A. sed s/e/y file1.txt > fix.txt
B. sed /y/e/g file1.txt > fix.txt
C. sed s/e/y/g file1.txt > fix.txt
D. sed /y/e/g file1.txt > ./fix.txt
E. sed s/e/y/g < file1.txt > ./fix.txt
Answer: C, E
Question: 143
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 42 of 64
Identify the true statement about configure script.
A. It depends on make to create the Makefiles.
B. It creates the necessary Makefiles based on the user information.
C. It creates the required directories and subdirectories on the system.
D. It does not depend on the autoconf tool for the package installation.
Answer: B
Question: 144
Which command could help a user to output the data appended to a text file at the shell prompt,
as the file grows?
A. cat
B. xxd
C. head
D. tail
E. more
F. strings
Answer: D
Question: 145
The root user on server1 is trying to switch to the normal user account scott for testing certain
privileges he has and receives an error as shown below:
[root@server1 ~]# su - scott
This account is currently not available
[root@server1 ~]#
What do you infer from this error?
A. The user scott's account is locked.
B. The user scott has the shell set to /bin/false.
C. The user scott is assigned with a UID below 500.
D. The user scott's account has reached the expiry date.
E. The user scott has the shell set to /sbin/nologin.
F. The user scott does not have a valid UID to get authorized by the system.
Answer: E
Question: 146
Which three statements are true about Local Shell variables? (Choose three.)
A. set by the shell
B. user modifiable
C. accessible by child processes
D. value restricted to a single shell
E. passed to programs started by the shell
Answer: A, B, D
Question: 147
What happens when you execute the lpq command without passing any arguments?
A. It lists all the jobs in the default queue.
B. It lists the jobs in all the available queues.
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 43 of 64
C. It removes all the jobs available in the default queue.
D. It removes the jobs available in all the available queues.
Answer: A
Question: 148
The cut -d: -f 1,3,8 /etc/passwd command is issued on a Linux system. Which statement about
the output is true?
A. It displays an error because /etc/passwd has only seven fields.
B. It displays all the users and the corresponding UIDs from the /etc/passwd file separated by a :
field delimiter.
C. It displays all the users, corresponding GIDs, and login shell from the /etc/passwd file
separated by a : field delimiter.
D. It displays all the users, corresponding UIDs, and login shell from the /etc/passwd file
separated by a : field delimiter.
Answer: B
Question: 149
Match the directories with their contents.
1. BUILD/ a. contains pristine source tarball as well as any patches and other ancillary files
2. SOURCES/ b. contains the package.spec file that describes and controls RPM build
3. RPMS/ c. source tarball is extracted, patches applied, and compilation takes place
4. SPECS/ d. freshly built binary RPMs placed in these directories
A. 1-d, 2-b, 3-a, 4-c
B. 1-c, 2-d, 3-b, 4-a
C. 1-d, 2-c, 3-b, 4-a
D. 1-c, 2-a, 3-d, 4-b
Answer: D
Question: 150
You have the /home/ file system on server1 exported through NFS. You have a fresh installation
of Linux on a workstation and want to setup the workstation to mount and unmount the /home/
filesystem automatically. Which default configuration files on the workstation would you edit to
achieve this task?
A. Edit the /etc/fstab file.
B. Edit the /etc/inittab file.
C. Edit only the /etc/auto.home file.
D. Edit only the /etc/auto.master file.
E. Edit both the /etc/auto.home and /etc/auto.master files.
Answer: E
Question: 151
Exhibit:
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 44 of 64
Which two key combinations will help you edit more than one file at a time in the same terminal
window using vim editor as shown in the Exhibit? (Choose two.)
A. Control+w+w to edit in vertical split windows
B. Control+w+v to edit in vertical split windows
C. Control+w+h to edit in horizontal split windows
D. Control+w+s to edit in horizontal split windows
E. Control+Alt+v to edit in vertical split windows
F. Control+Alt+h to edit in horizontal split windows
Answer: B, D
Question: 152
You have issued the following command:
echo -e welcome\nTo Oracle\nEnterprise\rLinux
What would be the impact of -e switch on the echo command?
A. It honors the escape sequence only for the carriage return.
B. It honors the escape sequence only for the first new line character.
C. It honors the escape sequence only for the two new line characters.
D. It honors the escape sequence only for the second new line character.
E. It honors the escape sequence for both the new line characters and carriage return.
Answer: E
Question: 153
Which three statements are true about the mount command? (Choose three.)
A. It supports labels for mounting.
B. It can be used only by root to mount the local file system.
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 45 of 64
C. By default it can be used by an ordinary user to mount the local file system.
D. It will list all the currently mounted file systems, if executed without any arguments.
E. It will list only the file systems listed in /etc/fstab if executed without any arguments
Answer: A, B, D
Question: 154
UNIX was known as the most stable operating system ever released. Identify two major design
principles that help attain this stability. (Choose two.)
A. easily modifiable end user programs
B. all configuration data stored in binary files
C. entire policy decisions made by the kernel
D. everything in UNIX is either a file or a process
Answer: A, D
Question: 155
Match the following umask values with their effective file and directory permissions.
umask Files Directories
1) 0220 a) 666 777
2) 0000 b) 640 751
3) 0026 c) 600 700
4) 0077 d) 660 770
5) 0007 e) 000 000
6) 0777 f) 446 557
A. 1-b, 2-e, 3-d, 4-f, 5-c, 6-a
B. 1-f, 2-a, 3-b, 4-c, 5-d, 6-e
C. 1-d, 2-a, 3-b, 4-f, 5-c, 6-e
D. 1-f, 2-e, 3-b, 4-c, 5-d, 6-a
E. 1-d, 2-a, 3-f, 4-b, 5-c, 6-e
Answer: B
Question: 156
Exhibit:
Which command would give you the output shown in the Exhibit?
A. grep root /etc/passwd
B. grep -ni root /etc/passwd
C. awk '/bash$/' /etc/passwd | grep root
D. awk -F: '/bash$/ {print $0}' /etc/passwd | grep root
Answer: B
Question: 157
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 46 of 64
Observe the script below:
echo " Enter your name : "
read name
echo " Hello $name , Good Morning. "
What does read do in this script? (Choose all that apply.)
A. It will store the input in the name variable.
B. It will accept only file name as the input.
C. It will make the script stop execution if numbers are given as input.
D. It will make the program pause till the input is given through the standard input.
Answer: A, D
Question: 158
View the Exhibit and examine the output of the following command:
rpm -qR ftp
What would you infer from the output?
A. It shows the list of files in the querying package.
B. It shows all the packages installed in the system.
C. It shows all the packages dependent on the querying package.
D. It shows all the packages on which the querying package depends.
Answer: D
Question: 159
You log in as normal user bob and execute the mount command without any arguments. What
would be the output of this command?
A. mount will prompt for the device to mount.
B. All the currently mounted file systems will be displayed.
C. All the file systems defined only in /etc/fstab will be displayed.
D. mount will report an error which says the mount command is not found.
Answer: B
Question: 160
Identify commands that can process text in a file. (Choose all that apply.)
A. tr
B. cut
C. awk
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 47 of 64
D. paste
E. strings
F. dos2unix
Answer: A, B, C, D
Question: 161
You have logged in to a newly installed Oracle Enterprise Linux machine in the graphical mode.
Which default desktop will be used after you log in?
A. Xfce
B. Xpde
C. KDE
D. TWM
E. IceWM
F. GNOME
Answer: F
Question: 162
View the script given below:
for i in $(seq 5)
do
echo $i
done
What is the output of this script?
A. 1
2345
B. 5
4321
C. 1 2 3 4 5
D. 5 4 3 2 1
Answer: A
Question: 163
The user smith on your system complained that he is not able to change his password. As an
administrator, you long-listed the passwd command and the /etc/shadow file on the system.
View the Exhibit that shows the output.
What would you do to enable smith to change his password?
A. Set SGID on /usr/bin/passwd.
B. Set SUID on /usr/bin/passwd.
C. Set sticky bit on /usr/bin/passwd.
D. Set write and execute permissions for others on /etc/shadow.
E. Set read, write, and execute permissions for others on /etc/shadow.
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 48 of 64
Answer: B
Question: 164
As user smith you issue the mesg command on the tty1 terminal to know its status. The output of
the command is shown below:
[ smith@station2 ]$ mesg
is y
[ smith@station2 ]$
Which three statements are true in this context? (Choose three.)
A. The talkd daemon honors the current mesg status.
B. The wall command honors the current mesg status.
C. The talk command honors the current mesg status.
D. The talkd daemon does not honor the current mesg status.
E. The talk command does not honor the current mesg status.
F. The wall command does not honor the current mesg status.
Answer: A, B, C
Question: 165
Match the following commands with their actions in the execute mode of the vi editor:
1) :e! a) save and exit
2) :X b) exit even if changes have not been saved
3) :wq c) save and exit even if the file is read only
4) :w! d) forget changes since last write
5) :q! e) save the file even if it is marked read only
6) :wq! f) encrypt the file along with a password
A. 1-d, 2-f, 3-c, 4-b, 5-e, 6-a
B. 1-f, 2-b, 3-a, 4-e, 5-d, 6-c
C. 1-c, 2-b, 3-a, 4-f, 5-d, 6-e
D. 1-d, 2-f, 3-a, 4-e, 5-b, 6-c
Answer: D
Question: 166
After logging in as root, you want to install a new kernel. How would you install the new kernel?
A. Install the new kernel by using rpm with the -i option.
B. Install the new kernel by using rpm with the --F option.
C. Install the new kernel by using rpm with the --force option.
D. Upgrade the existing kernel with the new kernel using the -U option with the rpm command.
Answer: A
Question: 167
You have to start a process in the bash shell and at the same time want to work in the shell. How
would you achieve this without terminating the process?
A. Press [Ctrl] + [y] while the process is running.
B. Press [Ctrl] + [d] while the process is running.
C. Press [Ctrl] + [z] while the process is running.
D. Press [Ctrl] + [c] while the process is running.
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 49 of 64
Answer: C
Question: 168
Match the following backslash-escaped characters with their description:
1. \c a. newline
2 . \v b. carriage return
3 . \r c. vertical tab
4 . \n d. suppressing trailing newline
A. 1-d, 2-c, 3-b, 4-a
B. 1-b, 2-d, 3-c, 4-a
C. 1-c, 2-b, 3-a, 4-d
D. 1-a, 2-b, 3-d, 4-c
Answer: A
Question: 169
Observe the code given below:
a=5.56
b=4.32
c=`echo $a + $b | bc`
echo "$a + $b = $c"
echo " Final Output is $c"
What would be the final output of this code?
A. 9
B. 9.8
C. 9.9
D. 9.88
Answer: D
Question: 170
Bob wants to send the contents of the /project/javaclass file to smith using mail through the
command line. Which command would help him achieve the task?
A. mail smith@example.com < /project/javaclass.
B. mail smith@example.com > /project/javaclass.
C. mail smith@example.com << /project/javaclass.
D. mail smith@example.com >> /project/javaclass.
Answer: A
Question: 171
An attempt by bob to remotely access smith's shell results in an error as follows:
[bob@server100 ~]$ ssh server200
The authenticity of host 'server200 (192.168.0.200)' can't be established.
RSA key fingerprint is 1c:6e:b7:8b:65:cc:04:e8:16:ca:7e:81:de:d6:5e:c4.
What would you infer from the error?
A. The hostname could not be mapped to an IP address.
B. The PubkeyAuthentication parameter is set to no in the /etc/ssh/ssd_config file.
C. The ssh verified that the system claiming to be server200 is server200 and not any other host.
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 50 of 64
D. This response is because ssh is unable to find server200 in the ~/.ssh/known_hosts file of
server100.
Answer: D
Question: 172
The user smith issued the egrep "^[[:alnum:]]{4,}$" file1.txt | wc –l command. What would be the
expected output from this command?
A. the total number of lines that have 4 or more characters
B. the total number of words that have 4 or more characters
C. the total number of lines that are shorter than 4 characters
D. the total number of words that are shorter than 4 characters
Answer: A
Question: 173
Which two statements about bzip2 are correct? (Choose two.)
A. It supports recovery from media errors.
B. It is portable, works in 32/64 bit platform.
C. It has lower compression ratio than gzip.
D. Its default action saves original file after creating new compressed file.
E. It first does all of the decompression in memory, and then sends out the contents of the
decompressed file to STDOUT.
Answer: A, B
Question: 174
The user smith on station1 is trying to use sftp to transfer some files to and from stationX, and
receives an error message as shown below:
[smith@station1 ~]$ sftp stationx
Connecting to stationX...
root@stationX's password:
request for subsystem 'sftp' failed on channel 0
couldn't read packet: Connection reset by peer
[smith@station1 ~]$
How would you resolve the issue?
A. Restart the xinetd service on stationX with the gssftp service enabled.
B. Restart the sshd service on stationX with the IgnoreRhosts parameter set to no in
/etc/ssh/sshd_config.
C. Restart the sshd service on stationX with /usr/bin/sftp enabled as the subsystem parameter in
/etc/ssh/sshd_config.
D. Restart the sshd service on stationX with /usr/libexec/openssh/sftp-server enabled as a
subsystem parameter in the /etc/ssh/sshd_config file.
Answer: D
Question: 175
You have logged in as user smith at tty1 terminal and issued the following incomplete command
at the bash prompt:
[root@station1 ~]# if [ i > j ] then
>
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 51 of 64
The shell displays the default secondary prompt ">". What would you do to make "=>" as the
default secondary prompt temporarily only for user smith and for the tty1 terminal current
session?
A. Redefine PS1=?>
B. Redefine PS2=?>
C. Redefine PS3=?>
D. Redefine PS4=?>
Answer: B
Question: 176
Exhibit:
You have given 1 as the input. What is the output if the script is executed using the default shell
interpreter?
A. 1
2
3
4
5
B. 1
2
3
4
C. 1 2 3 4
D. 1 2 3 4 5
Answer: A
Question: 177
Identify the option that has the correct match for an Enterprise Linux standard/feature with its
description:
1) POSIX a) helps software to predict the location of installed files and directories
2) FHS b) helps provide compatibility among distributions
3) LSB c) GNU project's replacement for the UNIX kernel to work in Linux
4) HURD d) assures code portability between systems
A. 1-b, 2-d, 3-a, 4-c
B. 1-d, 2-a, 3-b, 4-c
C. 1-c, 2-a, 3-d, 4-b
D. 1-b, 2-c, 3-d, 4-a
Answer: B
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 52 of 64
Question: 178
Match the process status with its definition.
1. Running a. Waiting for some event (for example, user input)
2. Stopped b. Child not properly reaped by parent
3. Sleeping c. Still loaded in memory, but not running
4. Zombie d. Currently being allocated CPU slices
A. 1-b, 2-c, 3-b, 4-a
B. 1-a, 2-b, 3-d, 4-c
C. 1-d, 2-c, 3-a, 4-b
D. 1-c, 2-b, 3-a, 4-d
Answer: C
Question: 179
Which two statements are true about the init process? (Choose two.)
A. Process ID (PID) of init is always 1.
B. Process ID (PID) of init is always 0.
C. The first process spawned by the kernel is init.
D. init uses the exec() method to spawn a new process.
E. By default, normal users can use init to change the run level.
Answer: A, C
Question: 180
Note the following command executed by the user smith on server1.
[smith@server1 ~]$ groups
apps smith sysgroup admins scott
[smith@server1 ~]$ touch file1 newfile
[smith@server1 ~]$ mkdir dir1 dir2
[smith@server1 ~]$ ls
dir1 dir2 file1 newfile
What would be the default group of the files and directories created by user smith on server1?
A. scott
B. apps
C. smith
D. admins
E. sysgroup
Answer: B
Question: 181
Which file compression standards are recognized and could be decompressed by gunzip?
(Choose all that apply.)
A. zip
B. gzip
C. bzip2
D. compress
Answer: A, B, D
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 53 of 64
Question: 182
Identify the true statements about sendmail. (Choose all that apply.)
A. Sendmail is a mail server.
B. Sendmail acts as an e-mail client.
C. Sendmail supports only IMAP protocol.
D. Sendmail can be used to send a file with the -t option at the command line.
Answer: A, D
Question: 183
A user issued the following command on a Linux system:
find / -name passwd | cpio -o | bzip2 > passwd.cpio.bz2
What could be the purpose of issuing this command?
A. to find all files called passwd in the root file system ( / )
B. to find the /etc/passwd file and compress it using bzip2
C. to create a compressed cpio archive of all files with the name passwd.
D. to create a compressed cpio archive of the list of all files with the name passwd
Answer: C
Question: 184
You want to secure the server1 server by denying root access through ssh. Which file would you
edit on server1 to achieve this task?
A. ~/.ssh/rc
B. ~/.ssh/config
C. /etc/ssh/sshrc
D. /etc/ssh/sshd_config
Answer: D
Question: 185
Match the query commands with their functions.
1. rpm -qa a. lists packages on which the package depends
2. rpm -qi b. lists all packages installed on the system
3. rpm -qR c. list of all the files in the package
4. rpm -ql d. information about the package
A. 1-d, 2-c, 3-d, 4a.
B. 1-d, 2-c, 3-b, 4-d.
C. 1-b, 2-d, 3-a, 4-c.
D. 1-b, 2-c, 3-d, 4-a.
Answer: C
Question: 186
As an administrator you want to make sure that accidentally you do not delete files using rm
command. You also want to make sure that even the use of rm command without any valid
switches prompts for confirmation before file deletion. Which option would help you achieve this
task?
A. alias rm="rm -i".
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 54 of 64
B. alias rm="rm -f".
C. alias rm="rm -r".
D. alias rm="rm -v".
Answer: A
Question: 187
Exhibit:
What does the case statement do in the script? (Choose two.)
A. exits the script if 0 is supplied as the input
B. executes like a series of if-then-else statements
C. prints all output of all commands on standard output
D. executes the last echo statement if 0 is supplied as the input
Answer: B, D
Question: 188
As user smith you have executed the following command at station1:
[smith@station1 ~]$ ssh root@server1 /etc/init.d/sendmail restart
Which statement is true about the execution of this command?
A. The command fails with an error command not found.
B. The command is executed by station1 without logging in to server1.
C. The command is executed by the server1 server without sending back the output to station1.
D. The command is executed by server1 after the correct password is entered by the user and
the output is sent back to station1.
Answer: D
Question: 189
Exhibit:
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 55 of 64
You have logged in as the user bob and now you want to send a message to smith and check if
he is logged on to the system by using the w command. You find smith logged in to two terminals,
so you send the message using the write command without specifying smith's terminal. To which
terminal is the message sent?
A. the terminal with the least idle time
B. the terminal with the maximum idle time
C. to smith's last login terminal irrespective of the idle time
D. to smith's first login terminal irrespective of the idle time
Answer: A
Question: 190
As a root user you want to modify the default shell prompt to include the hostname as part of the
prompt. Also you want the change in the hostname to reflect on the prompt immediately. Which
option would help you achieve this task?
A. PS2='[`hostname`]'
B. PS1='[`hostname`]'
C. PS2=''[`hostname`]''
D. PS1=''[`hostname`]''
Answer: B
Question: 191
Match the positional parameter with its functionality.
1. $0 a. lists the number of arguments passed
2. $# b. name of the shell script
3. $@ c. lists the arguments passed
A. 1-a, 2-c, 3-b.
B. 1-b, 2-a, 3-c.
C. 1-a. 2-b, 3-c.
D. 1-c, 2-b, 3-a.
Answer: B
Question: 192
Exhibit:
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 56 of 64
A /project directory is created on a Linux file system with 1776 permissions. Which statement is
true?
A. Only the root user has complete control over the /project directory.
B. The user smith can create files in /project but he will not be able to delete them.
C. The user scott can do anything in the /project directory including deleting all files, even those
created by the root user.
D. All members of the apps group can create, delete, and modify all files that belong to the apps
group in the /project directory.
Answer: C
Question: 193
As a root user you have issued the following commands at the bash prompt:
[root@station1 ~]#set a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z
[root@station1 ~]#shift 9
[root@station1 ~]#echo ${10}
What would be the output of the echo command?
A. It will print the letter j.
B. It will print the letter s.
C. It will print $1 followed by the literal 0.
D. It will print ${10} onto the standard output.
Answer: B
Question: 194
Which two commands would you use to kill all the processes owned by the user smith? (Choose
two.)
A. pkill -9 -u smith
B. skill -9 -u smith
C. pkill -1 -u smith
D. skill -1 -u smith
E. pkill -19 -u smith
Answer: A, B
Question: 195
Identify the true statements about the nice value. (Choose two.)
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 57 of 64
A. It only accepts priority values less than 19.
B. By default it reduces the priority of a process by 10.
C. A higher nice value makes a process run at a lower priority.
D. By default a normal user can make a process run at a higher priority.
Answer: B, C
Question: 196
You have downloaded a file called firefox.tar.gz. Which of the following commands could help you
to extract the files from this tar file? (Choose all that apply.)
A. tar xjf firefox.tar.gz
B. tar xzf firefox.tar.gz
C. tar -xvjf firefox.tar.gz
D. tar --gzip -xf firefox.tar.gz
Answer: B, D
Question: 197
As a user smith you executed the following command to change the default priority of the date
command:
[smith@station2 ~]$ nice --10 date
nice : cannot set priority : Permission denied
[smith@station2 ~]$
What could be the reason for the error message?
A. smith does not have the SUID bit set on nice.
B. smith does not have the execute permission on nice.
C. smith does not have the permission to change the nice value from the default to a lower value.
D. smith does not have the permission to change the nice value from the default to a higher
value.
Answer: C
Question: 198
You receive a file that has the extension .tar and you are unable to open it. How would you find
what type of file it is?
A. By issuing the md5 command
B. By issuing the file command
C. By issuing the strings command
D. By issuing -t switch with the tar command
Answer: B
Question: 199
Match the following Regular Expressions (RE) with their resultant actions:
1) ^RE a) anchor RE at end of line
2) RE$ b) anchor RE at start of word
3) \
4) RE\> d) anchor RE at start of line
A. 1-d, 2-a, 3-b, 4-c
B. 1-a, 2-d, 3-c, 4-b
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 58 of 64
C. 1-c, 2-b, 3-d, 4-a
D. 1-b, 2-c, 3-a, 4-d
Answer: A
Question: 200
You execute the following command:
find /home/ -name ?.jpg? -type f -user john
What is the expected output of this command?
A. A list of all regular files and directories with the pattern jpg in file names and owned by the user
john, under the /home directory
B. A list of all the regular files with the extension .jpg and owned by the user john, under the
/home directory and subdirectories
C. A list of all the regular files with the extension .jpg and owned by the user john, under the
/home directory, not in subdirectories
D. A list of all the regular files with the extension .jpg and owned by the users john and root,
under the /home directory and subdirectories
Answer: B
Question: 201
When bash is invoked as an interactive login shell, what is the order in which the bash
configuration files are read with the assumption that all the files exist and are readable?
A. ~/.bash_profile,~/.bash_login,/etc/profile,~/.profile
B. /etc/profile,~/.bash_profile,~/.bash_login,~/.profile
C. ~/.profile,~/.bash_login,/etc/profile,~/.bash_profile
D. ~/.bash_login,/etc/profile,~/.profile,~/.bash_profile
Answer: B
Question: 202
As per the Linux Documentation Project (LDP), which directory in the File System Hierarchy
(FSH) holds the online distribution documentation that includes FAQs, How-to's, Web sites, and
so on?
A. /usr/include
B. /usr/share/doc
C. /usr/local/share
D. /usr/share/man/doc
Answer: B
Question: 203
The GNU project was started by Free Software Foundation (FSF) with a goal to create a free
UNIX Clone. What do you understand by the term free as per the terms of FSF?
A. The source code will be provided free of cost with the software.
B. The software is fully free and is charged only to fix breakdowns.
C. The software is distributed free in runnable (installable) form with no cost.
D. The software is distributed free but does not offer the freedom to redistribute it.
Answer: A
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 59 of 64
Question: 204
You have logged in as a normal user bob and use write and wall to chat with other users.
How are you able to chat with other user terminals?
A. because the SGID bit is set on both the write and wall commands, and the group ownership is
set to root
B. because the SUID bit is set on both the write and wall commands, and the group ownership is
set to tty
C. because the SUID bit is set on both the write and wall commands, and the group ownership is
set to root
D. because the SGID bit is set on both the write and wall commands, and group ownership is set
to tty
Answer: D
Question: 205
You have set HISTCONTROL=ignoreboth. What are the implications of this setting on history?
A. It saves both duplicates and commands prefixed with a space.
B. It ignores commands prefixed with a space but saves duplicates.
C. It ignores duplicates but saves the commands prefixed with space.
D. It ignores both the duplicate commands and commands prefixed with a space.
Answer: D
Question: 206
Exhibit:
The user scott tries to long-list the contents of the /tmp/newdir directory and receives an error.
What could be the possible solution to let scott list the files in /tmp/newdir?
A. chmod 750 newdir
B. chmod 700 newdir
C. chmod u=rwx newdir
D. chmod 740 /tmp/newdir
Answer: A
Question: 207
Identify the XDMCP query type in which a client machine connects to the first available machine
to get a list of all machines to which it can connect.
A. Direct
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 60 of 64
B. Indirect
C. Parallel
D. Broadcast
Answer: B
Question: 208
Identify two correct statements about the cp command in association with the inode table.
(Choose two.)
A. Deletes the old directory entry with the old file name
B. Allocates a free inode number placing a new entry in the inode table
C. Has no impact on the inode table (except for time stamp or location of data on disk)
D. Creates a new directory entry that associates with a new name and inode number
Answer: B, D
Question: 209
Identify the correct statements about the tr command? (Choose all that apply.)
A. It works from STDOUT.
B. It helps in Regex pattern matching.
C. It can be used to delete a set of characters.
D. It can be used to merge multiple blank lines into one.
E. It can be used to translate one set of characters into another.
Answer: C, D, E
Question: 210
A group of users on a Linux system have a common working directory /documents with 1770
permissions. You have a scenario where you have to let all users of the group delete any file or
directory in /documents. What would you do in this situation to let them delete any file or directory
in /documents?
A. Remove sticky bit on the directory.
B. Set 3770 permissions on /documents
C. Set rwx permissions for others on /documents.
D. Set 777 permissions on all files and directories in /documents.
Answer: A
Question: 211
As the user smith you issue the following command:
[smith@station1 ~]$ scp file1 bob@station1:~bob
Enter passphrase for key '/home/smith/.ssh/id_dsa': file1 100% 0 0.0KB/s 00:00
[smith@station1 ~]$
What is the authentication method used in the node?
A. Password authentication
B. Public Key Authentication
C. Host-based authentication
D. KeyBoard-Interactive Authentication
E. Challenge Response Authentication
Answer: B
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 61 of 64
Question: 212
Identify the true statement about AutoFS.
A. AutoFS mounting can be triggered only by a root user.
B. Both on demand mounting and unmounting of file systems is taken care of by AutoFS.
C. AutoFS automatically mounts the file systems on demand but requires manual unmounting.
D. AutoFS requires manual mounting of file systems but unmounts them without user
intervention.
Answer: B
Question: 213
Which two statements are true about lp? (Choose two.)
A. It submits files for printing.
B. It cannot alter a pending job.
C. By default it sets a priority of 100 to any print job.
D. It uses "localhost" or the value of the CUPS_SERVER environment variable as the default
hostname.
Answer: A, D
Question: 214
As the root user on station1, you are trying to administer a printer, configured on the server1
server using CUPS, through a browser. Which two statements holds true in this context. (Choose
two.)
A. CUPS uses port 630.
B. Public access provides only read access.
C. By default, CUPS accepts connections only from localhost.
D. Administering CUPS from a remote system does not require any authentication.
Answer: B, C
Question: 215
Which command could user smith use to change the time stamps of the file1 and dir1 given
below, to the current system time?
[smith@server1 ~]$ ls -l
-rw-rw-r-- 1 smith smith 6 Jan 20 10:01 file1
drwxrwxr-x 2 smith smith 4096 Jan 20 10:54 dir1
A. cat
B. stat
C. time
D. file
E. touch
Answer: E
Question: 216
Match the following symbolic notations of file permissions with their numeric values.
1) - - - s - - - - - - a) 5000
2) - - - - - - s - - - b) 4100
3) - - - - - - - - - t c) 7101
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 62 of 64
4) - - - S - - - - - T d) 1001
5) - - - s - - S - - t e) 7040
6) s - -S r - S - -T f) 2010
A. 1-d, 2-f, 3-b, 4-e, 5-c, 6-a
B. 1-b, 2-f, 3-d, 4-a, 5-c, 6-e
C. 1-f, 2-a, 3-c, 4-b, 5-e, 6-d
D. 1-b, 2-d, 3-f, 4-a, 5-e, 6-c
Answer: B
Question: 217
As normal user scott you have generated version 2 dsa key pair using the ssh-keygen program.
What are the default user permissions available for the private key?
A. Only read
B. Both read and write
C. Both read and execute
D. Both write and execute
E. All read, write, and execute
Answer: A
Question: 218
You execute the command given below:
find / -perm +7000 -ls
What is the expected output from this command? (Choose all that apply.)
A. List (ls) all files and directories on the system with full permissions set.
B. List (ls) all files and directories on the system with all special permissions set.
C. List (ls) all files and directories on the system with any of the special permissions set.
D. Long-list (ls -l) all files and directories on the system with all the special permissions set.
E. Long-list (ls -l) all files and directories on the system with any of the special permissions set.
Answer: C, E
Question: 219
Exhibit:
Which command would change the root user's current working directory to /usr/local?
A. cd -
B. cd ../..
C. cd usr/local
D. cd ~/usr/local
Answer: A
Question: 220
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 63 of 64
As a root user, you have configured a file system using AutoFS with the default settings. You
changed to one of the directories under AutoFS control at the tty1 terminal and started working at
the tty2 terminal. What is the status of the file system mounted in the tty1 terminal after the idle
time as mentioned in the /etc/auto.master file?
A. The file system remains mounted until you logout from tty1 terminal.
B. The file system remains mounted as long as the system is up and running.
C. The file system is unmounted the moment you start working at the tty2 terminal.
D. The file system gets unmounted automatically after left idle for 5 minutes irrespective of the
AutoFS configuration file time settings.
Answer: A
Question: 221
Exhibit:
/tmp/backups is a directory with SUID and SGID set as shown in the Exhibit. The user smith is
trying to access this directory. Which three statements are true? (Choose three.)
A. The user smith can only navigate to the /tmp/backups directory using the others permissions
on the directory.
B. The user smith cannot even list the files in the /tmp/backups directory because SUID is meant
for executables only.
C. The user smith has full permissions on the /tmp/backups directory because SUID enables him
to work with the security context of the root user.
D. The user smith has full permissions on the /tmp/backups directory because SGID enables him
to work with the security context of the root group.
E. The user smith cannot even list the files in the /tmp/backups directory because not only SGID,
but also the group membership an permissions for the group are required on the directory.
Answer: A, B, E
Question: 222
You have logged in as normal user bob with the default login shell. An attempt by bob to change
the default shell to /bin/sh fails with an error. What could be the possible reason?
A. The SUID bit is not set on chsh by default.
B. The /bin/sh entry is not listed in /etc/shells file.
C. bob does not have the permissions to change the shell by default.
D. bob does not have read permissions on the/etc/shells file by default.
Answer: B
Question: 223
The root user tries to create the hard link link1 to /root/textfile in /boot and receives the error:
[root@server1 ~]# ln textfile /boot/link1
Exam Name: Oracle Enterprise Linux: Fundamentals
Exam Type Oracle
Exam Code: 1Z0-402 Total Questions: 224
Page 64 of 64
ln: creating hardlink `/boot/link' to `textfile': Invalid cross-device link
Which two statements are true? (Choose two.)
A. Hard links cannot span file systems.
B. /boot file system does not exist or it is not mounted.
C. /boot can occupy files that are required at boot time only.
D. Hard links cannot be created to the nonexistent file /root/textfile.
E. Hard link is supposed to be another physical presence of a file on the same file system.
Answer: A, E
Question: 224
The user smith wants to navigate to the /usr/share/doc directory. His current working directory is
/home/smith. Which of these commands would help smith to navigate to the /usr/share/doc
directory? (Choose all that apply.)
A. cd /usr/share/doc
B. cd ../usr/share/doc
C. cd / ; usr/share/doc
D. cd ../../usr/share/doc
E. cd / ; cd usr/share/doc
Answer: A, D, E
End of Document
Oracle EXAM 1Z0-531 Oracle Essbase 11 Essentials
Total Questions: 69
Question: 1
Which six files are involved in data base recovery for block storage option after a database crash? A. Essn.pag - data B. Essn.ind - index C. Essn.dat D. Temp.dat E. Dbname.esm - kernel file that contains control information for db recovery F. Dbname.tct - transaction control table G. Dbname.ind - free fragment file for data and index free fragments H. Dbname.otl I. Metadata folder
Answer: B, C, F, G, H, I
Question: 2
Which two options would provide a better design for the following accounts and metrics? A. If there are a small number of accounts that require FTE and Expense dollars, split Accounts and Metrics into 2 dimensions B. If there are a large number of accounts that require FTE and Expense dollars, split Accounts and Metrics into 2 dimensions C. If repointing dictates FTE and doolars in the columns and accounts in the rows, split Accounts and Metrics into 2 dimensions D. If block size is large, then keep Accounts and Metrics as one dimension with a dense dimension setting
Answer: C
Question: 3
Identify the two true statements about incremental loading. A. Allows for real time data access for end users B. Creates “subcubes” along the main slice in the database C. Materialization of slices is required to provide users the correct query results D. Different materalized views may exist within a slice as compared to the main slice of the database
Answer: A, D
Question: 4
You should back up the following three for ASO. A. Hyperion_Home \common B. Essbaseinstallfolder\bin C. Essbaseinstallfolder \app\appname D. Essbaseinstallfolder \locale E. Essbase.sec F. Essbase.cfg
Answer: B, C, D
Question: 5
You have the following analysis requirement. Products roll up to Product Family which rolls up to Product Category. You also need to group Products by Product Manager. Product Managers may manage one or more Products across product families. You do not need to create reports with Product Manager by Product Family. You need to secure products by Product Manager for planning submissions. You consider Shared members as a solution because of which two options? A. Shared members provide cross tab reporting (Product Manager in the rows and Product Family across the column) B. Share members provide additional categorization but results in a smaller database then if you were to add Product Manager as a separate dimension C. You can assign security to shared members D. Share members can be assigned to spares members only
Answer: B, D
Question: 6
Identify four disadvantages / considerations when using a transparent partition. A. Old data B. Slow retrievals C. Slow calculations if referencing dynamic calc members in the source D. Outline sync complexities E. Increased network load F. Downtime required to sync data
Answer: B, C, D, E
Question: 7
Assuming Scenario and Year are sparse and Accounts is dense, what two actions will following calc script perform? FIX (Actual, &CY, Sales) DATAEXPORT”BINFILE” “data. txt”; ENDFIX
A. Export the data for actual, current year, sales into a text file called data.txt B. Export the data for actual, current year into a taxt file called data.txt C. Export data blocks in a compressed encrypted format D. Create a text file that can be imported using the DATAIMPORTBIN calc command in another database that has different dimensionality
Answer: A, C
Question: 8
A calculation script is performend on a databased for which Create Block on Equation is OFF. The command SET CREATEBLOCKONEQ ON is issued immediately before an equation in the script. Which statement accurately describes when blocks will be created? A. Blocks will be created ONLY when the equation assigns non-constant values to members of a spatse dimension B. Blocks will be created ONLY when the equation assigns constant values to members of a spatse dimension C. Blocks will be created when the equation assigns either constant or non-constant values to members of a spare dimension. D. No blocks will be created.
Answer: C
Question: 9
Market size is an attribute dimension with the following members: Large, Medium, Small. Which of the following option below represent valid syntax statements in a calc script? A. FIX (@ATTRIBUTE(Large)) B. Calc Dim (Accounts, Markets, “Market Size”); C. Calc Dim (Accounts, Markets, Market Size); D. FIX(Large)
Answer: A
Question: 10
Moving a stored entity member in a sparse dimension causes______. A. a Full restructure B. an Index restructure C. an Outline restructure D. No restructure
Answer: B
Question: 11
During a multidimensional analysis getting data from a supplemental data source is an example of______. A. Drill across B. Drill Through C. Trending D. Pivoting
Answer: A
Question: 12
Identify the two true statements about expense reporting tags. A. Provide accurate time balance calculations B. Provide accurate variance reporting on revenue and expense accunts C. Are assigned to the dimension tagged Time D. Are assigned to the dimension tagged Accounts E. Are assigned to the dimension containing variance members
Answer: B, D
Question: 13
Block size is calculated by the following formula. A. Number of stored spase dimension members multiplied together times 8 bytes B. Number of total spase dimension members multiplied together times 8 bytes C. Number of dense spase dimension members multiplied together times 8 bytes D. Number of total dense dimension members multiplied together times 8 bytes
Answer: C
Question: 14
Given the following information, what is the block size? Markets: Sparse, 10 stored members, 10 total members Product: Sparse, 5 stored members, 7 total members Accounts: Dense, 10 stored members, 11 total members Time: Dense, 5 stored members, 12 total members A. 400 KB B. 400 Bytes C. 1056 KB D. 50 Bytes E. 1056 Bytes F. 50 KB G. 70 KB
Answer: B
Question: 15
Which three options will clear query tracking results in ASO? A. Materialize an aggregation B. Clear the data in the database C. Stop the vapplication D. Turn off E. Change an outline
Answer: A, B, D
Question: 16
Identify the four true statements about ASO “under the covers” A. Tablespaces are utiliaed to store data and metadata B. Page files and index files are utilized to store data store data and metadata C. Default - stores numeric data (.dat file) D. Bin - store numeric data (.dat file) E. Data - store numeric data (.dat file) F. Metadata - store numeric information about the objects in the database G. Metadata - store numeric data (.dat file) H. Temp - temporary working space for the Essbase kernel
Answer: A, C, E, F
Question: 17
Fragmentation has a number of potential causes. Identify two. A. Deleting member from a sparse dim B. Deleting member from a dense dim C. Renaming a member D. Renaming an alias E. Submitting data/deleting data frequently (like in budget applications)
Answer: B, E
Question: 18
Within which two directories can you set the location and file size in ASO? A. Default B. Metadata C. Log D. Temp E. Bin F. Data
Answer: A, D
Question: 19
Which three statements are true about multiple hierarchies in ASO? A. First hierarchy must be stored. B. Multiple hierarchies must be enabled by dimension. C. First hierarchy must be dynamic. D. All alternate hierarchies must be dynamic. E. Alternate jierarchies may be either dynamic or stored.
Answer: A, B, E
Question: 20
Identify the five true statements. A. CALC DIM is faster than AGG on Sparse dimensions B. AGG is faster than CALC DIM on Sparse dimensions C. CALC DIM caloulates mumber formulas D. AGG calculates member formulas E. CALC DIM caloulates Sparse dimensions F. AGG calculates Sparse dimensions G. CALC DIM caluulates Dense dimensions H. AGG calculates Dense dimensions
Answer: B, C, E, F, G
Question: 21
In an aggregate storage database, which two are the correct member solve orders for Profit per Unit and Variance given the following: Profit Unit - Accounts dimension Variance - Scenario dimension When we say “correct,” we mean that both dynamic totals will calculate and display correctly. A. Accounts 0, Profit Per Unit 0, Scenario 0, Variance 1 B. Accounts 0, Profit Per Unit 1, Scenario 0, Variance 0 C. Accounts 2, Profit Per Unit 0, Scenario 0, Variance 1 D. Accounts 2, Profit Per Unit 1, Scenario 1, Variance 2
Answer: A, D
Question: 22
Identify the true statement about the data cache. A. Data cache contains compressed data blocks B. Data cache contains uncompressed data blocks C. Data cache contains compressed index entries D. Data cache contains uncompressed data index entries
Answer: B
Question: 23
What is the extension for the file containing data for ASO applications? A. .pag B. .dat C. .txt D. .aso E. .fil
Answer: B
Question: 24
In Smart View, when zooming in and out of dimensions in Essbase, if you need to go back to a previous step, you can: A. Undo one time B. Flashback one time C. Undo up to specified number of times D. Use Microsoft Excel Undo
Answer: A
Question: 25
You need to display a text value based on variance data in an ASO database. If the variance percentage is less the 10, users should see “Low Priority,” if the variance percentage is between 11 and 25, users should see “Medium Priority,” and if variance percentage is greater than 25, users should see “High Priority.;” The Essbase feauture that supports this capability is: A. Text List B. Formatstring C. Text data type of a measure D. Trigger E. Not possible in an ASO database
Answer: A
Question: 26
Identify the three true statements about the Administration Services console. A. You can create custom views in EAS; Custom views help administrators focus those apps, databases or servers that apply to them B. Server can be added to a custom view C. Applications and databases can be added to a custom view D. Calc scripts can be added to a custom view E. Rules files can be added to a custom view
Answer: A, B, C
Question: 27
You need to track and report the Store Close Date for all of the stores in your company in your block storage option database. Store close will vary by over time. Which three solutions would allow you to do this? A. Attribute dimension based on Store B. Varying attribute dimension with an Independent dimension of Time where Time contains both the Years and Months in the same dimension C. Varying attribute with 2 Idependent dimensions, Periods and Fiscal Year D. Measure called Store Close Date with a data type of date E. User Defined attribute Store Close Data assigned to each stone
Answer: C, D, E
Question: 28
Given the following, what is the block size in bytes? Measures (Dense): 40 stored members, 50 total members Time (Dense): 17 stored members, 17 total members Scenario ((Dense): 2 stored members, 5 total members Market (Sparse): 100 stored members, 100 total members Product (Sparse): 500 stored members, 550 total members A. Block size = 40 * 17 * 2 B. Block size = 40 * 17 * 2 * 8 C. Block size = 50 * 17 * 5 D. Block size = 50 * 17 * 5 * 8
Answer: B
Question: 29
Which two statements are true (assuming data is loaded to a BSO database and to the members noted below)? A. If you delete a spares shared member, the outline file shrinks B. If you delete a spares shared member, the page file shrinks C. If you delete a spares shared member, the index file shrinks D. If you delete a spares shared member, the block density shrinks E. If you delete a spares shared member, the block size shrinks F. If you delete a spares shared member, the number of blocks shrinks
Answer: A, F
Question: 30
Which four are the directories used for aggregate storage databases? A. Default B. Log C. Metadata D. Data E. Bin F. Temp
Answer: A, B, C, F
Question: 31
What is the default calculation order for ASO database? A. Accounts, Time, all remaining dimensions in ascending order of member count B. Time, Accounts, all remaining dimensions in ascending order of member count C. Accounts, Time, all remaining dimensions in descending order of member count D. Time, Accounts, all remaining dimensions in descending order of member count E. Dynamic hierarchies, Stored hierarchies F. Stored hierarchies. Dynamic hierarchiea
Answer: F
Question: 32
You are creating a MaxL script to log into the database, update a dimension, load data, and run a calculation. Identify the two true statement about creating this MaxL sript. A. A separate MaxL script is required for each step B. The password must be hardcoded into the script when logging in C. IFERROR can be used in MaxL to handle errors after each statement, when triggered will skip to a subsequent statement D. Variables for objects like server names, application names and database names can be used in a MaxL script to help with maintenance
Answer: B, D
Question: 33
What does DTS (Dynamic Time Series) do? A. Calculates to date values for Essbase block storage databases B. Dynamically calculates the Time dimension C. Enable Time Balance functionality for accounts D. Calculates to date values for Essbase aggregate storage databases
Answer: A
Question: 34
Which three are Essbase components? A. Essbase server B. Administration services C. C API D. Web Analysis E. Financial reporting
Answer: A, B, C
Question: 35
Which setting will give information about when a data block is calculated? A. SET MSG INFO; B. SET MSG SUMMARY; C. SET MSG DETAIL; D. SET MSG WARNING;
Answer: B
Question: 36
What are the three rules for Shared Members in ASO? A. A Multiple Hierarchy Enabled dimension can have shared members B. When a hierarchy is tagged Multiple Hierarchies Enabled, it must be store C. The alternate hierarchy has shared members that refer to nonshared members of previous hierarchies in ht eoutline D. The shared members roll up according to a different hierarchy from the nonshared members to which they refer
Answer: A, C, D
Question: 37
Changing an dense dimension member from stored to dynamic causes ________. A. a Full restructure B. an Index restructure C. an Outline restructure D. No restructure
Answer: A
Question: 38
You are building a sales analysis model. In this model there is no requirement for calculation. The user needs to aggregate data across all dimensions and wants to archive many year of data. Archived data will be analyzed once in while. What types of cube would you build using Essbase for this kind of requirement? A. Block Storage B. XOLAP C. Aggregate Join D. Virtual Cube
Answer: C
Question: 39
Where are the ASO data files managed? A. Page files B. Index files C. Tablespaces D. Bin files
Answer: C
Question: 40
Given the following information, how many potential blocks? Markets: Spare, 10 stored members, 10 total members Product: Sparse, 5 stored members, 7 total members Accounts: Dense, 10 stored members, 11 total members Time: Dense, 5 stored members, 12 total members A. 100 B. 70 C. 560 D. 350 E. 400 F. 50
Answer: F
Question: 41
The data block density for a particular BSO database is between 10% and 90%, and data values within the clock do not consecutively repeat. Which type of compression would be most appropriate to use? A. Bitmap B. RLE C. ZLIB D. No compression required
Answer: A
Question: 42
You need to calculate average units sold by the customer dimension within an ASO database. The member formula should calculate correctly regardless of level within the customer dimension. Identify the correct syntax for the member formula. A. @AVG (SKIPBOTH, "Units_Sold"); B. Avg(Customer.CurrentMember.Children, [Units_Sold]) C. Avg(Customer.Children, [Units_Sold]) D. Avg(Customer.CurrentMember.Children, [Units_Sold]); E. Avg(Customer.Children, [Units_Sold]);
Answer: B, D
Question: 43
With an average block density greater than 90%, A. You should reconsider the dense and sparse settings B. You should consider no compression C. You should set Commit blocks to 0 D. You should reconsider the outline order of dimensions
Answer: D
Question: 44
You are performing incremental loads to an ASO database during the day, providing near realtime data to the SaleDtl ASO database. Before the incremental load, you need to clear a specific set of data in the fastest amount of time possible. What is the best solution? A. Partial clears are not supported for ASO B. Perform a logical clear, using MDX to specify the region to be cleared C. Perform a physical clear, using MDX to specify the region to be cleared D. Run a calc script containing the CLEARDATA command and a set of FIX statements that isolate the desired data set E. Run a calc script containing the CLEARBLOCK command and a set of FIX statements that isolate the desired data set
Answer: B
Question: 45
Identify the two true statements about materializaiton in ASO. A. When performing an incremental data load, aggregate views are updated. B. The database is not available during materialization C. Materialization can be tuned via query hints and hard restrictions defined at the database level D. Materialization scripts can be saved for future reuse
Answer: C, D
Question: 46
You need to tune a block storage option database for calculations on a 32bit Essbase server. Identify the two starting point tuning steps that you might take (assuming no direct I/O). A. Set Index Cache the size of the index file B. Set Data Cache to the size of .025 * data file C. Set Data File Cache to the size of .025 * data file D. Reset sparse and dense dimensions to achieve a block size greater than 100KB
Answer: A, B
Question: 47
The following two members would be optimally tagged Label Only. A. "Profit" B. "Ratios" C. "Scenario" D. "Q1" E. "January"
Answer: B, C
Question: 48
Your current block storage option design includes two dimensions: Markets and Regions. The Market dimension looks like: Region Northeast Southwest Users need to be able to report by both regions and markets. Subtotals for Northeast and Southwest will display on some reports. A. Add another level to the market dimension for Northeast with North and East as children and Southwest with West and South as children. B. Add an alternate hierarchy to the market dimension with the states as shared members, rolling up to Northeast and Southwest. C. Create a UDA with members Northeast and Southwest (associated to states in the Market dimension) D. Create an attribute dimension with members Northeast and Southwest (associated to states in the Market dimension) E. Create a Text list with the values containing the members Northeast and Southwest.
Answer: B
Question: 49
Which two valid field headers could be assigned to the 5th column in this data file? Duplicate Member Names is not enabled. A. Alias B. Attribute C. Generation 4 D. UDA E. Property
Answer: B, D
Question: 50
Which files will get restructured in a full BSO restructure? A. Data file only B. Index file only C. Data and index file D. No file
Answer: C
Question: 51
What are five reasons to use Attributes over a Shared Members dimension? A. To create crosstab reports B. To describe a dense dimension C. To describe a sparse dimension D. To perform comparisons based on certain type of data E. To perform calculations based on characteristics F. To add dimensionality to the database without increasing database size
Answer: A, C, D, E, F
Question: 52
What is the correct cariance formula for an ASO database that recognizes Expense and Non-expense accounts? A. @Var(Actual, Budget); B. @Var([Actual], [Budget]) C. [Actual] - [Budget] D. [Budget] - [Actual] E. IIF (IsUda([Measures.currentmember], "Expense"), [Budget] - [Actual], [Actual] - [Budget])
Answer: E
Question: 53
Given the following, what if the declared block size? A. 1920 bytes B. 480 bytes C. 3840 bytes D. 12450 bytes
Answer: C
Question: 54
You receive the following error: Error: 1042017: Netork error: The client or server timed out waiting to receive data. Which two settings in the Essbase.CFG are most commonly used to correct the issue? A. DISPLAYMESSAGELEVEL B. NETDELAY C. NETRETRYCOUNT D. MAX_REQUEST_GRID_SIZE E. MAX_RESPONSE_GRID_SIZE
Answer: B, C
Question: 55
Which statement related to Essbase design is true? A. Calc scripts are nore efficient at performing calculations vs. member unary operators and member formulas B. One big application is better than three smaller focused applications. C. Attribute dimensions require less performance consideration in ASO databases because they are treated as alternate rollups D. Attribute dimensions require less performance consideration in BSO databases because they are dynamically calculated E. Bigger block sizes are better than smaller block sizes
Answer: C
Question: 56
Which four of the following activities can be performed by the administrator in Shared Services? A. Creates users and groups B. Accesses external users and groups for provisioning C. Migrates applications using Life Cycle Management D. Creates cube schemas from a relational database E. Provisions Essbase roles for users and groups like Read, Write, and Filter F. Creates Essbase filters
Answer: A, B, C, E
Question: 57
Identify the three invalid methods to back up ASO databases. A. MaxL alter database commands B. Esscmd BEGINARCHIVE / ENDARCHIVE C. Backup and Recovery features introduced in version 11 D. Operating System backup
Answer: B, C, D
Question: 58
Identify the four true statements about attribute dimensions A. Attributes allow cross tab reports with other dims B. Attributes are assigned to dense dimensions C. Attributes are stored D. Attributes are dynamically calculated E. Security can be assigned by attribute dimension F. Even though ASO databases allow many dimensions, attribute dimensions are still available and used in aggregate storage option databases
Answer: A, D, E, F
Question: 59
You notice that your reports are running slower than before and realized that nothing in terms of data volume or dimension members has changed. You also checked the log file and found that no one ran any calculation. Which two would you look for to diagnose the cause of this slower response time? A. Run a MaxL comment to see if the database is fragmented B. Check when was the last time the application was stopped C. Check the data cache setting D. Check the commit-level setting
Answer: A, C
Question: 60
You have a reporting requirement to track and report the employee status for employees in your workforce ASO Essbase database. Employee status can change over time. One report requires employees down the rows and employee status across the columns. What is the best solution to meet the all of the requirements? A. Separate Employee status dimension B. Text List C. Smart List D. Attribute dimension E. Varying attribute dimension F. Alternate hierarchy G. User defined attribute
Answer: A
Question: 61
Identify the two true statements about compression for block storage databases. A. Index value pair compression works well for consecutive zero values or repeating values within a database. B. RLE compression works well for consecutive zero values or repeating values within a database. C. Bitmap compression is the default compression method. D. The Accounts dimension is tagged the compression dimension by default. E. Do not set compression for a dimension that has many members.
Answer: B, C
Question: 62
Identify the two true statements about block density for a Block Storage (BSO) database. A. Block density is the percentage of blocks that exist compared to the total number of blocks. B. Block density is the percentage of data that exists within a block compared to what can be stored in the total block. C. Ideally block density will be high. D. You can view the block density on the Application Properties tab in the Administration Services console.
Answer: B, C
Question: 63
The following objects are considered metadata elements in Essbase Studio except for which two? A. Dimensional element B. Hierarchy C. Cube Schema D. Metaoutline E. Essbase Model F. Metamodel
Answer: D, F
Question: 64
In Essbase 11.1.1, what are two possible ways to calculate Period to Date values in ASO? A. Enable Dynamic Time Series B. Analytic dimension with member formulas to calculate period to date values C. Alternate hierarchy in Time dimension to rollup period to date values D. Create a Date Time dimension
Answer: C, D
Question: 65
You are trying to create a multidimensional model for Essbase and learn that your user wants to track commission for his sales persons, in addition to tracking sale by regions. When designing a multidimensional model, which two elements will serve as facts (measures)? A. Sales person B. Commission C. New York D. Sales F. Year to Date
Answer: B, D
Question: 66
What security filter will assign security to a hierarchy, filtering the members displayed to end users? A. Read Filter B. Write Filter C. Metaread Filter D. Metadate Filter E. Not possible to secure dimensions; Only data can be secured
Answer: C
Question: 67
In Essbase, security can be managed in ______. A. Shared Services B. Administration Services C. Essbase Studio D. Shared Services or Administration Services E. All of the above
Answer: D
Question: 68
Identify the two true statements about data loads to ASO and BSO databases. A. Data can only be loaded to level 0 members in ASO databases where BSO allows data loads to upper level members. B. Cells at all levels can be loaded (except Dynamic Calc members) for both ASO and BSO. C. After an ASO data load, no further calculation is required. D. Concurrent loads are supported for both ASO and BSO.
Answer: A, C
Question: 69
You have the following customer dimension:
You need to create a % of Total (by region) calculation by customer in your aggregate storage database for Net_Revenue. Select the best syntax for the member formula so that the % Total calculation works at all levels of customer dimension. A. (Net_Revenue]) / (Parent, [Net_Revenne]) B. (Customer.CurrentMember, [Net_Revenue]) / (Customer.CurrentMember.Parent, [Net_Revenue]); C. (Customer.CurrentMember, [Net_Revenue]) / (Customer.CurrentMember.Parent, [Net_Revenue]) D. (Customer.CurrentMember, [Net_Revenue]) / (Customer, [Net_Revenue]); E. (Customer.CurrentMember, [Net_Revenue]) / (Customer, [Net_Revenue], Products, YearTotal);
Answer: D
Oracle EXAM 1Z0-532 Oracle Hyperion Financial Management 11 Essentials
Total Questions: 64
Question: 1
What are the three characteristics of sub EnumMemberLists ()? A. Specifies which dimensions have member lists B. Names each member list in eachdimension C. Specifies the valid members for a member list D. Specifies the number of lists for each dimension E. Is used to create both static and dynamic lists
Answer: B,C,D
Question: 2
Identify the dimensions that are built by using the applicationprofile? A. Year and period only B. Value and view only C. View, Period, and Year D. Period, Value, and Year E. Scenario, Period, and Year
Answer: C
Question: 3
To which dimension do custom dimensions provide additional detail? A. Accounts B. Entity C. Value D. ICP E. Custom dimensions are independent of other dimensions.
Answer: E
Question: 4
The Account dimension's Is ICP"R" property specifies________. A. If ICP transactions,including self-ICP transactions, are enabled for the account B. If ICP transactions are not enabled for the account C. if ICP transactions can be drilled back to source activity D. if ICP transactions are enabled for the account, but the account cannot have ICP transactions with itself
Answer: C
Question: 5
EPMA provides a Shared Dimension Library for maintaining EPM dimensions. Identify two reasons that would make you consider using EPMA to maintain dimensions over FM Classic metadata files? A. You can use the same metadata file format from FM Classic to import dimensions In EPMA. B. Dimensions can be shared across applications or can be local to a specific application. C. In EPMA, you can make a change to a member in a shared dimension once and sync ft across FM and Planning applications. D. You can assign member access security in the EPMA dimension library for a shared dimension and sync it across FM and Planning applications.
Answer: C,D
Question: 6
Which is the rule function used to notify the following year that a consolidation is needed due to recalculation of the current year? A. Exp B. ImpactStatus C. OpenDataUnit D. A rule function is not used; input subroutine is used.
Answer: A
Question: 7
Identify three valid application settings A. MaxNumDocAttachments B. UseSecurityForEntities C. UseSecurityForValue D. Va1idationAccount E. SupportSubmissionPhaseforEntity
Answer: B,C,D
Question: 8
Identify the purpose of using task lists. A. To upload user “to do”items to FM with due dates and alert dates B. To organize and group related tasks into a navigational aid for users C. To create lists of members with VB script D. To list tasks to be executed by the FM Server E. To define the review path for consolidation review
Answer: B
Question: 9
What are two effects of deploying an EPMA application? A. The EPMA metadata is extracted to a text file. B. If enabled, it pushes the data to Essbase via Essbase Analytic Link for FM. C. The EPMA application metadata is used to create an FM application on the FM server. D. The application is sent out to a star schema for use by Essbase and other products. E. When you redeploy an application, the application metadata is merged or replaced based on the changes made since the last deployment.
Answer: C,E
Question: 10
You need to migrate an FM application in version 11 from development to production. Your environment has two instances of Shared Services, one for development and one for production. Identify the two true statements about using Life Cycle Management to perform the application migration from development to production within this environment. A. You can select specific objects to migrate or all objects to migrate. B. Migrating applications from development to production in disconnected environments, where thereare two instances of Shared Services, is not supported. C. Life Cycle Management will migrate both objects and data. D. Life Cycle Management will generate an XML file that can be modified and used for importing totarget applications. E. The only role necessary to perform LCM activities is ApplicationAdministrator.
Answer: C,D
Question: 11
Identify the three true statements about I/C activity. A. Intercompany transactions are eliminated at the first common parent. B. Intercompany transactions can be processed for both open and closed periods. C. Matching tolerances can be set by percent, dollar amount, orboth. D. Eliminations are processed during both Calculation and Consolidation processes. E. I/C reports are available to display transactions by status-Matched, Mismatched, or Unmatched.
Answer: B,D,E
Question: 12
For metadata loads, you can import changes to metadata for which three application elements? A. Periods B. Accounts C. Entities D. Currencies E. Value
Answer: A,B,E
Question: 13
Identify the three true statements about security classes. A. Security classes are grouping mechanisms for assigning security access to sets of related members, documents, or other objects. B. Access levels for security classes include metadata, read, promote, and none. C. Security classes are assigned to FDM locations in addition to FM objects. D. Security classes cannot be created in EPMA by creating a Security Class dimension and associating it. E. Security classes are created in Classic FM under Load Tasks.
Answer: A,B,E
Question: 14
Fora classic application,what are the two valid methods to extract metadata to a text file? A. You can extract metadata usingthe EPMA file generator. B. Metadata can be extracted from within FM under extract tasks. C. Metadata can be extracted from within EPMA Dimension Library. D. Metadata can be extracted from the File > Export menu. E. Metadata can be extracted from an FDM application.
Answer: D,E
Question: 15
What is the primary purpose of Extended Analytics in FM? A. Exports Financial Management metadata and data to an Essbase database B. Exports Financial Management metadata and data to a relational database C. Exports Financial Management metadata and data to an Excel pivot table D. Provides analytic capabilities directly against the Financial Management application
Answer: C
Question: 16
The Audit Intersection link in Data Grid menus takes the user to: A. The Data Audit listing for the cell B. The FDM location used to load the data C. The database log for the data storage table D. The Task Audit page E. Line item details
Answer: D
Question: 17
How can an administrator get a list of security classes AND assigned users defined in the FM application? A. Select Document > Reporting > Security > Security report. r B) Select Tasks > Extract Tasks > Extract Security. B. Select Tasks > Extract Tasks > Extract Metadata. C. In the EPMA Dimension Library, under the Security Class dimension for the application, rightclick the application and select Assign Access Control, then select Security reports, and choose Classes by user. D. In Shared Services, right-click the application and select Assign Access control, then select Security reports, and choose Classes by user.
Answer: A
Question: 18
The organization by period feature is used for what two purposes? A. Segregating rules by month and year B. Controlling when entities consolidate into specific parents C. Organizing the period dimension into multiple hierarchies D. Managing the ownership percentage of one entity by others E. Maintaining stored data values for changes in the Entity structure over time
Answer: A,D
Question: 19
If Sample Company 1230LAP has an intercompany balance with sample company PQR, when is the balance eliminated, assuming that consolidation rules have not been enabled in Application Settings? A. All eliminations occur within the uppermost member on each of the entity dimension hierarchies. B. Eliminations occur in the [Elimination] value members of the children of the first common parent entity. C. Eliminations occur in the [Elimination] value members of the children of the first common parent account. D. If the consolidation rule in Application Settings is not enabled, the intercompany accounts do not eliminate.
Answer: C
Question: 20
How many custom dimensions do Financial Management applications allow? A. 2 B. 3 C. 4 D. 5 E. None. Financial Management supports only fixed dimensions.
Answer: E
Question: 21
You need to copy an FM Classic application including data from the production environment to the test environment to test new business rules. How can you do this? A. Use the FMCopyApplication.exe utility. B. Copy the application using the Admin Tasklist, select Extract Application and then import into a new application. C. Select the Copy User Provisioning in Shared Services. D. Use Life Cycle Management to migrate the artifacts and data. E. Use the EPMA File Generator Utility to extract and import metadata.
Answer: B
Question: 22
The Value dimension stores detail from child to parent for which dimension? A. View B. Entity C. Account D. Currency E. Scenario
Answer: A
Question: 23
Custom dimensions may be used to perform A. Cash Flows B. Roll forwards C. Historical Overrides D. B and C E. A, B, and C
Answer: D
Question: 24
Identify the two features that are available for data forms but not data grids. A. View and update data B. View calculation and consolidation status C. Change point of view selections D. Drill in and out on row and column members E. Export to Excel F. Open in Smart View
Answer: E
Question: 25
Identify the two true statements about property value inheritance for dimension members in EPMA. A. Property values are always inherited from ancestors and cannot be changed. B. Property values are inherited from the closest ancestor except when a property value has beenspecifically entered. C. You must manually enter and store property values for all the dimension members. D. Property value inheritance decreases maintenance requirements for dimensions. E. Inheritance takes precedence over properties defined in metadata load files.
Answer: B,D
Question: 26
Into which Value dimension member can a journal be entered? A. [Parent Adjs] B.
Answer: B
Question: 27
When designing for Planning and Financial Management, what are the design considerations for dimensions and member? A. In FM, spaces are allowed in member names while in Planning, spaces are not allowed in member names. B. In FM, spaces are not allowed in member names while in Planning, spaces are allowed in member names. C. In FM, descriptions are not required to be unique while in Planning, aliases must be unique. D. A and C E. B and C
Answer: D
Question: 28
In Task Automation, a link in a task flow: A. Passes the point of view to a stage B. Connects the task to a specific user C. Passes control from one stage to another D. Passes control from a task to the IT department E. Passes a process unit from one review level to the next review level
Answer: D
Question: 29
Life Cycle Management moves artifacts in which two ways? A. From one application to another application, moving Security, Dimensions, Phased Submissions, Rules, Documents, Forms, and Member Lists B. From Hyperion Enterprise into FM C. It does not move artifacts; it just verifies that artifacts are valid. D. From FM into various document management suites E. From one application to a file system, moving Security, Dimensions, Phased Submissions, RulesDocuments, Forms, and Member Lists
Answer: A,D
Question: 30
In addition to Sub translate routine, which two application settings are also used for translate? A. DefaultRateForICPAccounts B. DefaultRateForBalanceAccounts C. DefaultRateForExpenseAccounts D. DefaultRateForFlowAccounts
Answer: B,C
Question: 31
Identify the three true statements about the Financial Management architecture. A. Hyperion Financial Management uses a multitier architecture that includes a client tier,application tier, and a data tier. B. The client tier (user interface) communicates with the data tier. C. The client tier (user interface) communicates with the application tier. D. The application tier contains the application as well as the report and Web servers. E. The datatier contains the Essbase database for all Hyperion Financial Management applicationdata and source data.
Answer: A,C,E
Question: 32
What feature in Financial Reporting allows you to "drill into" a dimension? A. You cannot drill into dimensions in FR. B. Expansions C. Drill Options D. Zoom Options E. Enable for Smart Slice
Answer: A
Question: 33
What four actions can an administrator perform from the FM Administration menu? A. Manage documents. B. View system messages. C. Run Data and Task Audits. D. Manage Task Flows. E. Manage Security.
Answer: A,B,D,E
Question: 34
Identify the four processes through which Financial Management supports a virtual close. A. A fullyautomated consolidation tool that combines financial data across many ledgers andconsolidates to a corporate or business unit level B. Automatic posting of eliminating entries, accrual entries, and allocations C. Automated collection, mapping, verification, and movement of data D. Automated intercompany processing E. Analysis capabilities throughout close over the Web and in Excel
Answer: A,C,D,E
Question: 35
Identify the three true statements about accounts and account types. A. Financial Management provides predefined account types such as Asset, Revenue, Flow, Balance,and Dynamic. B. Account types tell FM how the child account should aggregate to the parent. C. Account types tell FM how the account balances should accumulate over time. D. Base level accounts do not automatically roll up to parents; business rules are required. E. Children cannot inherit the account type of their parent unless specifically defined by the administrator.
Answer: A,B,E
Question: 36
You are designing the dimensionality for your Financial Management application. Identify the two true statements about dimensionality in FM. A. Scenario dimension contains members such asCYActual,CYBudget, and PYActual. B. Value dimension contains Periodic, year-to-date, quarter-to-date, and any custom members added by the administrator. C. Value dimension contains Entity Currency, Entity Curr Adj, Entity Curr Total, ParentCurrency, and any currency members added by the administrator. D. The preferred method to add detail to accounts is to build subaccounts into the Accounts dimension. E. The Intercompany Partner dimension is managed by FM based on settings in the Entity dimension.
Answer: A,B
Question: 37
A Classic FM application profile contains which three components? A. Frequency B. Calendar C. Dimension Associations D. Language(s) E. Scenario
Answer: B,C,E
Question: 38
Identify the three true statements about Financial Reporting. A. Financial Reporting provides highly formatted, printable reports for FM applications. B. Financial Reporting provides ad hoc reporting capabilities for FM applications. C. Financial Reporting document types include reports, books, snapshots, and snapshot books. D. You can create a single P&L report and run that report for any member in the Entity dimension
Answer: A,C,D
Question: 39
Before you can define an alias for a dimension or member in EPMA, you must A. Do nothing; the Alias property is created by default B. Create an Alias dimension and associate it C. Create an Alias attribute D. Create an Alias Property E. Create an Alias Table
Answer: E
Question: 40
In which four ways can a user access FR reports? A. In the Workspace in HTML mode B. In the Workspace in PDF mode C. Over the Web outside of the Workspace in HTML mode D. In Smart View using the BI+ Connection E. In PDF format from an email
Answer: A,B,C,E
Question: 41
Identify the correct sequence for building a Classic FM application: 1-Create the application shell. 2-Create an application profile. 3-Define metadata such as dimensions and application settings. 4-Load data, data forms, member lists, rules, and journals. 5-Define security. A. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 B. 2, 1, 4, 3, 5 C. 2, 1, 5, 3, 4 D. 1, 2, 5, 3, 4 E. 1, 2, 3, 5, 4
Answer: C
Question: 42
Identify two true statements about the native data load file format. A. The default column order for the native data file is Scenario, Year, Period, View, Entity, Value, Account, ICP, Custom1, Custom2, Custom3, and Custom4. B. You cannot change the column order for the data file. C. The Group section defines the POV for the data file; you can define only a single member for each POV dimension. D. The Line Items detail section contains data values. E. The Group section is required.
Answer: A,C
Question: 43
Identify the two true statements about rule types in FM. A. The Dynamic rule type allows you to calculate both parent and base accounts. B. The NoInput rule type prevents users from entering data into specific cells or slices of cells usingHs.Nolnput. C. Calculate, Dynamic, Allocation, Input, No Input, Translate, Consolidate, Transactions, and Equitypickup are all valid rule types. D. If you need to calculate Gross Margin %, use the Translate rule type. E. Calculation rules are run only with FM specific calculation commands in Financial Management; no general VB commands.
Answer: A,B,D
Question: 44
Given the following syntax in a business rule: A. Calculate () B. strview C. Hs.Exp D. DIFFERENCE E. strPOV
Answer: A
Question: 45
Identify the three true statements about Dimension Associations in EPMA. A. Dimension associations are used when a property in one dimension is associated with the members in another dimension. B. The SecurityClass dimension is associated with the SecurityClass property only in an Account andEntity. C. The Alias dimension is associated with the Alias property for Account, Entity, and Scenario dimensions. D. The Currency dimension is associated with the Currency property of the Account dimension. E. A PlugAccount from the Account dimension can be associated with the Account dimension.
Answer: A,B,D
Question: 46
Identify the three true statements. The EPMA import files for metadata_______. A. Contains sections for Dimensions, Dimension Associations, Hierarchies, and Members B. Requires the Dimensions, Dimension Associations, Hierarchies, and Members section to create adimension C. Expects the Hierarchies section to be in Parent/Child format D. Requires that all members must be declared in the Members section before they can be added to the HIERARCHIES section E. Has it that the header, file_format = ads version =1.0, is optional for the import file
Answer: A,D,E
Question: 47
How many members Lists can you load at one time? A. 1 B. 2 C. 4 D. 10
Answer: A
Question: 48
Identify the three true statements about ERP Integrator (ERPI). A. ERPI supports PeopleSoft, Oracle E-Business Suite and SAP. B. ERPI integrates metadata and data from ERP source system into an Oracle Hyperion EPM targetapplication. C. ERPI provides drill through from Financial Management data forms, Smart View, and FinancialReporting. D. ERPI provides drill through to BI Dashboards. E. ERPI under the covers is Oracle Data Integrator.
Answer: A,B,D
Question: 49
How does the FM administrator manage the Intercompany Partner dimension? A. By selecting and deselecting the IsICP field on the entity member properties B. By selecting and deselecting the IsICP field on the account member properties C. It cannot be maintained by the administrator. FM automatically creates the ICP dimension to match all members in the Entity dimension. D. It cannot be maintained by the administrator. FM automatically creates the ICP dimension to match all members in the Account dimension. E. Using the Dimension editor in the same way as a custom dimension or Entity dimension
Answer: A
Question: 50
What are the two required steps for creating data synchronization? A. Map dimensions. B. Assign default members. C. Define mappings for all members D. Create the synchronization. E. Filter dimensions
Answer: B,C
Question: 51
Which utility imports users, groups, and roles into Shared Services? A. ImportSecurity.cmd B. ExportSecurity.cmd C. ProvisionUsers.cmd D. UpdateUsers.cmd E. CSSImport.cmd
Answer: D
Question: 52
You are designing the custom dimensions for your FM application. Identify the true statement. A. A dimension, once used for a specific purpose, can be used only for that purpose. B. All hierarchies within a custom dimension are automatically available to all the accounts. C. You specify the custom dimension members valid foran account by using the Custom1Top Member, Custom2 Top Member, Custom3 Top Member, and Custom4 Top Member. D. Hierarchies on custom dimensions must be symmetrical, with the same number of children under every parent. E. Different hierarchies within a custom dimension cannot be assigned to different accounts.
Answer: C
Question: 53
A custom function in rules is useful for: A. Organizing rules into subsets of code B. Controlling the ending of an If/Then C. Writing code that will be repeated in multiple places D. Defining conjunctions to be used along with variables E. Custom functions are not possible in FM,
Answer: B
Question: 54
The file format load journals to FM can include which four sections? A. File Format B. Scenario C. Journal Group D. Standard
Answer: A,B,C,D
Question: 55
Assuming you are using HFM Version 11.1.1.3, identify the three true statements about Calculation Manager. A. FMRulesMigrator.exe will migrate VB scripts into business rules in Calculation Manager. B. There is no utility to migrate VB script rules to Calculation Manager. C. In Calculation Manager, you can toggle back and forth between the graphical and script mode. D. In Calculation Manager, you can create one script that can execute against both a FinancialManagement application and Planning application. E. To use a business rule, you must validate and deploy the business rule.
Answer: A,C,D
Question: 56
Which clearing data using the Database Management module, dimension is not included for selection? A. Scenario B. Account C. Custom1 D. Entity E. Value
Answer: D
Question: 57
In a scenario with the zero view set to year-to-date, if January is $30 year to date and March is $90 year to date, what value does FM calculate for February year to date if no data is loaded? A. 0 B. 30 C. 45 D. 60 E. -30
Answer: D
Question: 58
Assuming you are using version 11.1.1.3, right-click menus are available in A. Data grids only B. Data forms only C. Task lists only D. Data grids and Data forms E. Data grids, Data forms, and Task lists
Answer: E
Question: 59
You need to track and report an additional level of detail for journal entries, tracking whether the adjustment came from the GL, legal, or other source. Identify the best method to meet this requirement. A. It is not possible to track additional levels of detail in journals. B. Build a custom dimension to capture the additional level of detail. C. Build subaccounts in the Accounts dimension to capture the additional level of detail. D. Use commentary to note the sources of journals. E. Use line item details.
Answer: A
Question: 60
Given the following syntax in a business rule: A. Calculate () B. strview C. Hs.Exp D. DIFFERENCE E. Hs.Scenario.DEFAULTVIEW (“”)
Answer: D
Question: 61
Your source data file has values for 12 months across the columns. What is the best way to load this file into FM with native load functionality? A. Split the file into 12 different files, each with a single month. Set the POV for the Period dimension = specific month. B. Define a range for periods in the POV with the following syntax: !Period = January..December. C. Make sure the column header has the month label; FM will load the column to the correct month. D. List the months in the POV with the following syntax:! Period= January-December. E. List the months in the POV with the following syntax:!Period = January, December.
Answer: B
Question: 62
Identify the four levels of security in Financial Management A. User Authentication B) Document B. Task C. Cell Level D. Data
Answer: A,B,C,D
Question: 63
What four steps are required to configure an FDM application with an FM application? A. Dimension names between FDM and FM are set in the FDM workbench or the Web client under metadata/dimensions. B. Define the FM application name in Integration Settings in FDM. C. Define the FM server name in machine profiles' properties. D. Map locations to an entity using the FDM workbench under Integration Settings. E. Define the FDM Web server name under IntegrationSettings in the FDM workbench.
Answer: A,C,D,E
Question: 64
You are loading data to FM under Load Tasks> Load Data. What are four valid options for how data should be loaded into the application? A. Merge B. Clear and Load C. Replace D. Replace by Security E. Accumulate within File F. Append
Answer: A,B,D,F
Links
Index
http://www.free-online-exams.com/Pages/Exams/DumpsQA.aspx?d=1&c=1z0-023&q=1
http://www.free-online-exams.com/Pages/Exams/ExamsList.aspx?code=69&Exam=Oracle
Exam : 1z0-023 - Oracle Architecture and Admin
http://www.free-online-exams.com/Pages/Exams/DumpsQA.aspx?d=1&c=1z0-023&q=1
Exam : 1z0-530 - Oracle 11g Enterprise Manager
http://www.free-online-exams.com/Pages/Exams/DumpsQA.aspx?d=Oracle&c=1z0-530&q=1
Exam : 1z0-054 - Oracle 11g Perf Tuning
http://www.free-online-exams.com/Pages/Exams/DumpsQA.aspx?d=1&c=1z0-054&q=1
1z0-515_V2 - Oracle 11g DW Essentials
Exam : 1z0-536 - Oracle 11g Exadata Essentials
Exam : 1Z0-538 - Agile Product LifeCycle Mgmt Essentials
Exam : 1z0-539 - Oracle GoldenGate Essentials
1z0-526 - Oracle 11g Business Intelligence Foundation Essentials
http://www.free-online-exams.com/Pages/Exams/DumpsQA.aspx?d=1&c=1z0-526&q=1
No comments:
Post a Comment